An Honet - Technical Manual (V7.11) PDF

Technical Manual
HONET Integrated Services Access Network
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Definition ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 Access Network (AN) Position in Telecom.............................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Definition of AN ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Functional Models of AN.................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 User Port Function .................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2 Service Port Function .............................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.3 Core Function .......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 Transport Function .................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.5 AN System Management Function ......................................................................... 1-4
1.3 AN Technologies and Developments ................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.1 XDSL Access Technology....................................................................................... 1-5
1.3.2 Optical Fiber AN Technology .................................................................................. 1-6
1.3.3 Wireless AN Technology ......................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.4 IP Access Technology............................................................................................. 1-7
Chapter 2 System Description ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 HONET Overall Architecture.............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 OLT.......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 ONU......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 Optical Transmission System.................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.4 AN-NMS .................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2 HONET Interfaces.............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.1 UNI .......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 SNI........................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 Maintenance Management Interface....................................................................... 2-6
2.3 Services Provisioning......................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.1 POTS....................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.2 ISDN ........................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.3.3 DDN Services .......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.4 IP Services .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.5 Z Interface Extension .............................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.6 2/4 Line Voice Frequency Interface ........................................................................ 2-8
2.3.7 2/4 Line E&M Interface............................................................................................ 2-8
2.3.8 CATV Services ........................................................................................................ 2-8
2.4 HONET System Features .................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.1 Multiple Subscriber Interfaces ................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.2 Intra-Frame Resource Sharing and Adjustable Convergence Ratio....................... 2-9
2.4.3 Upgrade and Scalability .......................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.4 Flexible Networking ................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.5 V5 Interface ........................................................................................................... 2-10
2.4.6 Integrated Access.................................................................................................. 2-10
2.4.7 Powerful Network Management ............................................................................ 2-10
2.4.8 Reliable System Performance............................................................................... 2-10
2.4.9 Abundant Product Series ...................................................................................... 2-10
Chapter 3 System Composition ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Summary............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Introduction to OLT.................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Introduction to ONU................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Optical Line Terminal (OLT)............................................................................................... 3-3
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
1
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
3.2.1 Physical Configuration of OLT................................................................................. 3-3

3.2.2 Composition and Function of Each Module in OLT ................................................ 3-3
3.2.3 Characteristics of OLT............................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Description of SIPP Functional Modules................................................................. 3-8
3.3 Optical Network Unit (ONU)............................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.1 Physical Configurations of ONU.............................................................................. 3-9
3.3.2 Composition and Function of Each Basic Module in ONU.................................... 3-10
3.3.3 Characteristics of ONU.......................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.4 Description of Functional Units.............................................................................. 3-13
Chapter 4 Subscriber Interface and Services Implementation ................................................. 4-1
4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Major Boards and Service Interface Types........................................................................ 4-1
4.3 POTS Services .................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.4 ISDN Integrated Services .................................................................................................. 4-4
4.5 Data Services..................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.5.1 Summary ................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.5.2 Implementation of Service Access in HONET......................................................... 4-7
4.6 Internet Services .............................................................................................................. 4-13
4.6.1 IP Access and LAN Interconnection...................................................................... 4-14
4.6.2 IP Bypass .............................................................................................................. 4-15
4.7 Z Interface Extension ....................................................................................................... 4-18
4.7.1 2/4-line VF Private Line Interface.......................................................................... 4-19
4.7.2 2/4 Line E&M Interface.......................................................................................... 4-20
4.8 CATV Access ................................................................................................................... 4-22
Chapter 5 Networking and Application ....................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 System Networking ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 Summary ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 SDH Optical Transmission System ......................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 PON Optical Transmission System ......................................................................... 5-4
5.2 Applications........................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.2.1 Integrated Access Network with Narrow-band/Broadband Services in City A........ 5-7
5.2.2 DDN Data Service AN in City B .............................................................................. 5-8
5.2.3 AN with Integration of Active/Passive Optical Transmission in City C .................... 5-9
5.2.4 MML Network Management of Access Network in City D .................................... 5-10
5.2.5 OMC SHELL Centralized Network Management in City E ................................... 5-11
5.2.6 Large-capacity and Highly-integrated AN in City F ............................................... 5-12
5.2.7 Object-oriented NM in City G ................................................................................ 5-13
5.2.8 Q3 NM Access in City H........................................................................................ 5-13
5.2.9 Local Network with 600 thousand lines in City I.................................................... 5-14
5.2.10 Local Network with 500 Thousand Lines in City J .............................................. 5-16
Chapter 6 Network Management.................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Summary............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 System Structure ............................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Local End Maintenance Mode ........................................................................................... 6-3
6.4 Remote Maintenance Mode............................................................................................... 6-7
6.5 Functions and Implementation of NMS............................................................................ 6-10
6.5.1 Functions ............................................................................................................... 6-10
6.5.2 Implementation Modes .......................................................................................... 6-27
6.6 DAS Network Management ............................................................................................. 6-34
6.6.1 System Description ............................................................................................... 6-34
6.6.2 Separation of Maintenance Authority .................................................................... 6-34
6.6.3 DAS Network Management Functions .................................................................. 6-34
6.7 External Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 6-35
6.7.1 Centralized Line Test Interface ............................................................................. 6-35
2
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
6.7.2 MML Interface ....................................................................................................... 6-46

6.7.3 Q3 Interface........................................................................................................... 6-48
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 Technical Specifications Applied in HONET System......................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Technical Standards Involved in AN ....................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Specifications for AN Service .................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.3 Specifications for SDH Optical Transmission Equipment ....................................... 7-2
7.1.4 Specifications for PON Optical Transmission Equipment ....................................... 7-3
7.1.5 Specifications for Electro-mechanical Area............................................................. 7-3
7.2 Performance Indexes of HONET System .......................................................................... 7-4
7.2.1 SIPP System Resources and Capacity................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2 Technical Indexes of HONET Interfaces................................................................. 7-6
7.2.3 HONET Electromechanical Indexes...................................................................... 7-34
7.2.4 HONET Clock System........................................................................................... 7-37
7.2.5 HONET System Reliability .................................................................................... 7-39
7.3 Indexes of Transmission Technology .............................................................................. 7-39
7.3.1 Technical Indexes of SDH Optical Transmission Equipment................................ 7-39
7.3.2 Technical Indexes of HONET-PON16 Optical Transmission Equipment ............. 7-52
7.3.3 Transmission Indexes for Board-Embedded APDH Optical Transmission
Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 7-57
7.3.4 Transmission Indexes of CATV Module................................................................ 7-58
7.4 Protection Measures and Performance ........................................................................... 7-58
7.4.1 Protection Index of Main Distribution Frame (MDF).............................................. 7-58
7.4.2 Protection Indexes of Lightning Protection Box .................................................... 7-59
7.5 Ground Requirements...................................................................................................... 7-59
7.6 Estimation of Power Consumption................................................................................... 7-59
7.7 Indexes of ETS450WLL Wireless Access System .......................................................... 7-60
7.7.1 Frequency Range.................................................................................................. 7-60
7.7.2 Coverage Area ...................................................................................................... 7-60
7.7.3 Traffic and Subscriber Capacity ............................................................................ 7-60
7.8 Indexes of ETS1900 Wireless Access System................................................................ 7-61
7.8.1 Frequency Range.................................................................................................. 7-61
7.8.2 Coverage Area ...................................................................................................... 7-61
7.8.3 Traffic and Subscriber Capacity ............................................................................ 7-61
Appendix A Abbreviations............................................................................................................A-1
Appendix B Glossary ....................................................................................................................B-1
B.1 112 Test.............................................................................................................................B-1
B.2 A ........................................................................................................................................B-1
B.2.1 AN: Access Network ...............................................................................................B-1
B.2.2 An: Access Node ....................................................................................................B-2
B.2.3 AN-SMF (Access Network - System Management Function).................................B-2
B.2.4 AON- All Optical Network........................................................................................B-3
B.2.5 ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode)......................................................................B-3
B.3 B ........................................................................................................................................B-3
B.3.1 BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts) ...........................................................................B-3
B.3.2 BORSCHT Functions..............................................................................................B-3
B.3.3 Bridge......................................................................................................................B-4
B.4 C ........................................................................................................................................B-4
B.4.1 Cable Modem..........................................................................................................B-4
B.4.2 Call Loss Ratio ........................................................................................................B-5
B.4.3 Client/Server ...........................................................................................................B-5
B.5 D ........................................................................................................................................B-5
B.5.1 DAS.........................................................................................................................B-5
B.5.2 Data Link .................................................................................................................B-6
3
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
B.5.3 DDN ........................................................................................................................B-6

B.5.4 Direct Dial-in ...........................................................................................................B-6
B.5.5 DLC .........................................................................................................................B-7
B.5.6 DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) .................................................................................B-7
B.5.7 DTE/DCE/DTE Interface/DCE Interface .................................................................B-9
B.6 E ........................................................................................................................................B-9
B.6.1 E&M Signaling ........................................................................................................B-9
B.6.2 Erlang......................................................................................................................B-9
B.7 F.......................................................................................................................................B-10
B.7.1 FAS (Flexible Access System) .............................................................................B-10
B.7.2 Fast Ethernet (100BASE-T) ..................................................................................B-10
B.7.3 Frame Relay .........................................................................................................B-11
B.7.4 FXO (Foreign Exchange Office Interface) ............................................................B-11
B.7.5 FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber Interface) .....................................................B-11
B.8 G ......................................................................................................................................B-11
B.8.1 Gateway ................................................................................................................B-11
B.9 H ......................................................................................................................................B-12
B.9.1 HDLC (High Level Data Link Control) ...................................................................B-12
B.9.2 HGRP (Huawei General Remote Subscriber Processing) ...................................B-12
B.9.3 HONET..................................................................................................................B-12
B.9.4 Hub........................................................................................................................B-13
B.10 I......................................................................................................................................B-13
B.10.1 Inter-module Interconnection and Inter-module Cascade ..................................B-13
B.10.2 ISDN, N-ISDN and B-ISDN.................................................................................B-13
B.11 L.....................................................................................................................................B-14
B.11.1 LAN (Local Area Network) ..................................................................................B-14
B.11.2 Local Network .....................................................................................................B-15
B.12 M....................................................................................................................................B-15
B.12.1 MML ....................................................................................................................B-15
B.12.2 MODEM (Modulator-demodulator) .....................................................................B-15
B.13 N ....................................................................................................................................B-16
B.13.1 Narrowband and Broadband...............................................................................B-16
B.13.2 NCP.....................................................................................................................B-16
B.13.3 Network Clock/Service Clock/Transmission Clock/ Port Clock ..........................B-16
B.13.4 Network Synchronization/Port Synchronization/BIT Synchronization ................B-17
B.13.5 Node....................................................................................................................B-17
B.14 O ....................................................................................................................................B-17
B.14.1 OMC 2000...........................................................................................................B-17
B.14.2 On-line Test ........................................................................................................B-17
B.14.3 On-line Upgrade..................................................................................................B-18
B.15 P ....................................................................................................................................B-18
B.15.1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) ...........................................................................B-18
B.15.2 PON ....................................................................................................................B-18
B.16 Q ....................................................................................................................................B-18
B.16.1 Q3 Management Interface ..................................................................................B-18
B.17 R ....................................................................................................................................B-19
B.17.1 R Series ONU and V Series ONU ......................................................................B-19
B.17.2 Router .................................................................................................................B-19
B.17.3 Routine Test........................................................................................................B-19
B.18 S ....................................................................................................................................B-20
B.18.1 SDH.....................................................................................................................B-20
B.18.2 Server..................................................................................................................B-21
B.18.3 SIPP (Service Interface and Protocol Processing Module) ................................B-21
B.18.4 SN: Service Node ...............................................................................................B-21
B.18.5 SNI: Service Node Interface ...............................................................................B-22
B.18.6 SPF: Service Port Function.................................................................................B-22
4
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
B.18.7 Synchronization and Asynchronization...............................................................B-22

B.19 T.....................................................................................................................................B-23
B.19.1 TCP/IP Protocol ..................................................................................................B-23
B.19.2 Telecommunication Supporting Networks ..........................................................B-23
B.19.3 TF: Transport Function .......................................................................................B-23
B.19.4 TMN (Telecommunications Management Network) ...........................................B-24
B.19.5 TTL Level Interface and Differential Balance Level Interface.............................B-25
B.20 U ....................................................................................................................................B-25
B.20.1 UNI: User Network Interface ...............................................................................B-25
B.20.2 UPF: User Port Function.....................................................................................B-26
B.21 V ....................................................................................................................................B-26
B.21.1 V5 Interface.........................................................................................................B-26
B.21.2 V.35/V.24/U/E1 ...................................................................................................B-26
B.21.3 VC/PVC/SVC/LC.................................................................................................B-27
B.21.4 VOD (Video on Demand) ....................................................................................B-27
B.22 W ...................................................................................................................................B-27
B.22.1 Wide Area Network .............................................................................................B-27
B.23 X ....................................................................................................................................B-28
B.23.1 X.25 Protocol ......................................................................................................B-28
B.23.2 X.50 Protocol ......................................................................................................B-28
Appendix C HONET Pictures........................................................................................................C-1

5
Technical Manual
Table of Contents

6
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Definition
1.1.1 Access Network (AN) Position in Telecom
In recent years, digital and broadband equipment has been widely used for switching and
transmission. However, the access network becomes the bottleneck of telecom
development due to various reasons. The priority of telecom development is digitalization
and integration of the access network equipment and network optimize.
In terms of functions, Telecom consists of switching network, transmission network and
access network. Access network is located at the bottom of the telecom, which provides
basic services for the subscribers. Figure 1-1 shows its position in telecom. AN connects
local exchange (LE) and the subscribers. It transmits various services to the subscribers
transparently. Entities providing the telecom services are called service node (SN).
Subscriber
network
Subscriber
premise network
Subscriber
network
AN
LE
LE
network
Transmission
AN
Subscriber
premise network
Figure 1-1 Position of AN in Telecom
1.1.2 Definition of AN
AN covers all the equipment and transmission media between SN and subscriber
terminal, including subscriber cable, multiplex equipment, digital cross-connect
equipment (DXC), user/network interface equipment.
Figure 1-2 illustrates the definition of access network. AN consists of a series of entities
between service node interface (SNI) and user network interface (UNI), such as the line
equipment and transmission facilities. AN configuration and management can be made
through Q3 interface. In principle, there is no limit to type and quantity of UNI and SNI
in AN.

7
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Q3
UNI
SNI
V5.1
POTS
V5.2
Digital multiplexing
ISDN
protocol
Leased line
ATM/IP protocol
Access network
Radio
PAL
Video
SXC
ATM/IP node
Broadcast
television
SECAM
ATM/IP service
LE
NTSC
Figure 1-2 Schematic diagram of AN
AN can be defined by UNI, SNI and Q3 interface, through which it is connected to other
network entities. User terminal in connected to AN through UNI. AN gets connected to
the SN through SNI. AN and SN get connected to telecom management network (TMN)
through Q3 interface. Figure 1-3 shows the relationship among various network entities.
Telecom Management Network (TMN)

UNI
POTS
ISDN
Radio
Video
LL
Q3
Access
Network
(AN)
Q3
SNI
Service
Node
(SN)
Figure 1-3 Relationship between AN and NE
1.2 Functional Models of AN

As shown in Figure 1-4, AN functions consists of user port function (UPF), core function
(CF), transport function (TF), service port function (SPF) and AN system management
function (AN-SMF). Detailed descriptions of each function are as follow.

8
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Q3
Access network
AN-SMF
CF
UNI
TF
UPF
CF
SPF
SNI
Bearing subscriber and subscriber signalings

Control and management information
Figure 1-4 Functional models of AN
1.2.1 User Port Function

UPF adapts requirement of specific UNI to the CF and SMF. AN supports multiple
access services with specific UNI requirement at the same time. UNI is determined by the
interface regulations and requirements on access capacities, i.e. the specific transmission
protocols and protocol bearer.
UPF include the following.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
To connect to terminals with UNI.

A D conversion
Signaling conversion
UNI activation/deactivation
Processing of UNI bearer and UNI capacity
UNI test
Control function
1.2.2 Service Port Function

Functions of service interfaces are as follows.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
To connect with the SNI terminal.

Mapping the bearer and operational requirements, real time acceptance to the
core function.
Mapping protocols required by a particular SNI.
To make SNI test.
To maintain SPF
To accept and handle services.
To control services.

9
Technical Manual
1.2.3 Core Function
Table of Contents
Core function (CF) is between UPF and SPF, which maps the services borne by a certain
subscriber port or a service port to that of the common bearer. Its functions include make
adaptation based on certain protocols and processes protocol bearing according to
requirements on transmission and multiplexing. Core functions can be selected depending
on actual needs.
Core functions includes the following.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Processing access services.

Concentration of bearer channels.
Multiplexing of signaling and packet information.
Circuit emulation of transmission over ATM.
Management function
Control function
1.2.4 Transport Function
Transport Function provides channels for the common bearer entities in different
locations of AN and makes adaptation for the related transmission media.
Transport functions include the following.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Multiplexing function
Traffic distribution and configuration DXC
Management function
Providing physical media
1.2.5 AN System Management Function
Access network system management function refers to the function of configuring and
managing UPF, SPF, CF and TF in the AN. Its main functions include the following.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Configuration and control

Provisioning and coordination
Fault detection and indication
Collection of operation information and performance data.
Security control
Coordination of the operation requirements from SNI and UPF, as well as real
time management on them.
Resources management
1.3 AN Technologies and Developments
Access technologies include xDSL, optical access, hybrid access, wireless access and IP
access.
1.3.1 XDSL Access Technology
xDSL technology is a digital subscriber technology which transmits digital signals over
the twisted-pair cable. Digital subscriber line technologies can deliver asymmetric or
symmetric rate in the upstream rate and downstream. IDSL, SDSL, HDSL technology
deliver symmetric transmission rate, while ADSL and VDSL deliver asymmetric
transmission rate.

10
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
I. ISDN digital subscriber line (IDSL) technology
Using 2B1Q coding, IDSN provides the subscriber access rate of 64K, 128K and 144K. It
is mainly applied in ISDN voice and data services.
II. High-rate digital subscriber line (HDSL) technology
HDSL technology provides duplex transmission rate of 1.5/2Mbit/s over two or three
pairs of twisted-pair cables. Its transmission distance can reach 3~5km over twisted pairs
with diameter of 0.4~0.6mm. No repeater is needed. Apart from providing long
transmission distance, HDSL simplifies the equipment installation & maintenance, as
well as networking design. HDSL technology is applicable to PBX network, mobile
communication base station relay, digital loop system, network interconnection, Internet
server and dedicated digital network.
III. Symmetric digital subscriber line (SDSL) technology
SDSL consists of HDSL, HDSL2, moderate digital subscriber line (MDSL). They are the
same in nature, in that they deliver symmetric transmission rate over a single pair of
twisted-pair cable. SDSL technology has no strict requirement on line quality. It can
deliver various rates, including N64K and E1/T1. The subscribers can select the optimal
rate according to the true traffic. SDSL is applicable to LAN interconnection, video
conference, E1/T1 dedicated line, SOHO, Internet, interactive multi-media.
IV. Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Technology
ADSL technology delivers high-speed asymmetric rate over twisted-pair cable, using
discrete multi-tone (DMT) modulation.
ADSL rate reach up to 640kbit/s in
the upstream, and 8Mbit/s in the downstream. G.Lite ADSL rate reach up to 512kbit/s in
the upstream, and 1.536Mbit/s in the downstream. As ADSL is separated from POTS
service in terms of frequency, it wont affect the POTS services. With no need to change
the existing network distribution, ADSL provides the subscribers with services such as
high-speed Internet access, VOD, video telephone.

V. Very high-rate digital subscriber line (VDSL) technology
VDSL technology advances the transmission distance. The upstream rate and
downstream rate may vary depending on the transmission distance. For example,
downstream rate over transmission line of 1000m or 1500m can reach 25Mbit/s, or even
52Mbit/s. Voice signaling and 25/52M digital signaling are both transmitted over the
same twisted-pair cable using frequency division multiplexing (FDM) mode. The
upstream rate can reach 1.6Mbit/s.
VI. Comparison of xDSL Access Technologies
The differences between xDSL access technologies lie in line code, rate and transmission
distance, as shown in Table 1-1:
Table 1-1 Comparison of xDSL Access Technologies

Transmission
distance
Upstream/downstream rate
VDSL
52M/1.6Mbit/s
0.9
Modulation Mode
QAM

11
Major applications
HDTV,VR
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
ADSL
8M/640kbit/s
5.5
DMT/CAP
HDSL
1.5-2.048M/1.5-2.048Mbit/s
4.6
2B1Q
SDSL
IDSL
1.5-2.048M/1.5-2.048Mbit/s
144k/144kbit/s
6.9
5.5
2B1Q
2B1Q
Internet access, VOD, LAN

interconnection
E1/T1 services, WAN or LAN
access
HDSL application
ISDN voice and data services
1.3.2 Optical Fiber AN Technology
The future information world requires high-speed access and reliable transmission of
broadband services. Optical fiber AN can overcome the limitations of the copper cable
AN and support the future broadband services. FTTx (FTTH / FTTO / FTTZ / FTTB /
FTTC / FTTV) is the trend of AN development.
I. SDH technology
SDH combines the high-speed and large capacity fiber transmission technology with the
intelligent Network Element (NE) technology. With the SDH self-healing ring and
ATM/IP exchange, the AN can provide the interactive and distributive services of audio,
video and data, It can reasonably distribute the transmission bandwidth and capacity
according to the requirement, thus realizing broadband access.
II. PON technology
PON Passive Optical Network uses time division multiplexing (TDM) /TDMA, passive
optical splitting technology, ranging technology, fast synchronization technology and
burst optical/electric technology. It can form multiple networking topologies, including
tree, star and bus. PON system adopts passive optical units, which features network
reliability and cost-effectiveness. Small-capacity PON system is especially applicable to
narrow-band service access in geographically distributed area.
III. Hybrid optical/twisted pair copper cable network
Hybrid optical / twisted pair copper is the most widely used AN, including FTTC, FTTZ
and FTTB. In hybrid optical / twisted pair copper AN, ONU can still be connected with
the subscribers using twisted pair. The restricted transmission distance facilitates the
network construction and modification. The main party of the network used the optical
fiber, thus ensuring large capacity and quality transmission. FTTC, combined with ADSL
and VDSL, provides an economic means for broadband service access. FTTC is an ideal
bridge from coaxial cable network to optical network.
1.3.3 Wireless AN Technology
The wireless AN refers to introduction of wireless transmission media into part or whole
of the AN to provide both fixed and mobile terminal services for subscribers.
I. Fixed wireless access
In the rural areas and community with small amount of residents, using the existing radio
technologies, such as microwave, satellite, cellular and cordless technologies can provide
multiple services flexibly at a lower cost.

12
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
II. Mobile wireless access
Mobile wireless access include GSM, DECT and radio paging system.
1.3.4 IP Access Technology
It is estimated that, in the next decade, the data services all around the world will exceed
the phone services. It changes the telecom globally, and brings some new problems for
Telecom development, esp. the IP services access. It is a challenge for all network
carriers.
Compared with the traditional telephone service, IP service has the following features.
1)
2)
3)
Longer duration: Generally, the calling time of ordinary telephones is 3~5

minutes on average, and 9 minutes during busy hours, while the login time of IP
subscribers is typically 30~50 minutes or even longer. And it is increasing in a
sustained way.
Independent call: Due to the longer duration of IP service, it interferes with the
normal operation of ordinary telephones seriously, and further forces a lot of
subscribers to use a secondary telephone line.
Asymmetry of service amount: According to the statistics, the IP service used
mostly at present includes obtaining of electronic mail news and product
information, downloading of software and education service. The major feature
of this service is the larger amount of downlink service and fewer amount of
uplink service. This point is especially important for the research and
development of IP access system.
IP service subscribers consist of two types generally. One is family users and small
enterprise. The other is large enterprise In terms of access mode, it consists of dial-up
access and dedicated line access. IP access can be enabled through connecting with the
router, through LAN interconnection or VPN. Different access mode requires different
transmission rate.
Currently, the commonly used media are the existing twisted pair, the optical fiber or
wireless resource. Different transmission technologies are used for different transmission
media. Technologies available in twisted pair include 56K Modem, ISDN and xDSL. For
optical transmission, technologies available include Cable Modem, ATM-PON, built-in
SDH. For wireless transmission, there are mobile wireless access and fixed wireless
access. Fixed wireless access means include satellite, wireless cable Modem and LMDS.
Mobile wireless access means include packet switching celluar technology and circuit
switching CDPD technology.
Carriers should select the specific IP access technology depending on the network
conditions, service development strategies and subscriber information.

13
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 System Description ...................................................................................................... 15
2.1 HONET Overall Architecture............................................................................................... 15
2.1.1 OLT........................................................................................................................... 15
2.1.2 ONU.......................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.3 Optical Transmission System................................................................................... 18
2.1.4 AN-NMS ................................................................................................................... 18
2.2 HONET Interfaces............................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1 UNI ........................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.2 SNI............................................................................................................................ 19
2.2.3 Maintenance Management Interface........................................................................ 20
2.3 Services Provisioning.......................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1 POTS........................................................................................................................ 20
2.3.2 ISDN ......................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.3 DDN Services ........................................................................................................... 20
2.3.4 IP Services ............................................................................................................... 21
2.3.5 Z Interface Extension ............................................................................................... 21
2.3.6 2/4 Line Voice Frequency Interface ......................................................................... 21
2.3.7 2/4 Line E&M Interface............................................................................................. 21
2.3.8 CATV Services ......................................................................................................... 21
2.4 HONET System Features ................................................................................................... 22
2.4.1 Multiple Subscriber Interfaces .................................................................................. 22
2.4.2 Intra-Frame Resource Sharing and Adjustable Convergence Ratio........................ 22
2.4.3 Upgrade and Scalability ........................................................................................... 22
2.4.4 Flexible Networking .................................................................................................. 22
2.4.5 V5 Interface .............................................................................................................. 22
2.4.6 Integrated Access..................................................................................................... 22
2.4.7 Powerful Network Management ............................................................................... 23
2.4.8 Reliable System Performance.................................................................................. 23
2.4.9 Abundant Product Series ......................................................................................... 23

14
Technical Manual
Chapter 2 System Description

2.1 HONET Overall Architecture
Table of Contents
HONET integrated services access network consists of optical line terminal (OLT),
optical network unit (ONU), optical transmission system, AN network management
system (AN-NMS). If ONU in HONET is V-series ONU, OLT may not be necessary.
HONET can implement service access, transmission and NM. Figure 2-1 shows HONET
architecture.
Service provisioning
AN
Subscriber terminals
Router
ONU
LE
OLT
64Kbit/s
V.35/V.24
d
Twiste
pair
Phone
ONU
PC
DDN
ONU
2B+D/30B+D
TV
coaxial
Ethernet
AN-NMS
coaxial
E1 dedicated line
Figure 2-1 HONET overall architecture
2.1.1 OLT
OLT is located in the side of service node.
It is connected to the switch through V5.2 interface. Signaling transfer equipment (STE),
which is optional, also exists in the HONET access system. STE is needed when LE does
not provide V5 interface. STE is connected to LE using SS7 and No.1 signaling, and
connected to OLT through V5 interface.
OLT gets connected to DDN through E1 interface.
OLT consists of service interface & protocol processing module, optical transmission
module, background management module (BAM). See Figure 2-2.

15
DDN
V5.2
E1
NM
Table of Contents
E1
Optical transmission
module
LE
Protocol processing module

Service interface &
Technical Manual
BAM
Figure 2-2 OLT architecture
Service interface & protocol processing module: this module implements service access.
The services from service nodes are processed by the protocol processing unit and then
transmitted to the user interface. Finally the services are sent to the terminals to finish
service distribution.
Optical transmission module: configuration of this module varies depending on the
optical transmission equipment in it. The built-in transmission equipment may be SDH
Optix155/622H and PON-16. Optical transmission module can be in an independent
frame.
BAM: it is embedded in NM interface provided by OLT. BAM consists of the following
optional accessories: an industrial computer, MCP card, multi-serial-port card, network
card, Modem card. It is the bridge between various service consoles and other equipment
in the HONET system. One BAM occupies a frame in OLT.
2.1.2 ONU
ONU is located at the subscriber side. It provides various service interfaces for telephone,
data communication and video services. ONU is connected to the phones through twisted
pairs. The data services are provided through ISDN 2B+D interface, V.35/V.24
N64kbit/s or subrate interface. In addition, ONU provides 2M dedicated line services
through E1 interface.
Similar to ONU, OLT consists of service interface & protocol processing module, optical
transmission module, power and environment monitoring module. See Figure 2-3.

16
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
protocol processing module
Optical transmission module
E1
E1
Phone
terminal
Phone
terminal
Date
terminal
Power and environment

monitoring module
Figure 2-3 ONU architecture
Service interface & protocol processing module: similar to that in OLT, this module
consists of main control unit and subscriber unit. They differ in the fact that main control
unit in ONU use PV8 frame or RSP frame instead of GV5 frame.
When ONU uses PV8 as main control frame, it can get connected to the LE directly
through V5 interface.
Optical transmission module: its optional built-in transmission equipment include SDH
Optix155/622H, PON-16, or SDH Optix155C.
Optical transmission module implements the function of multiplex / demultiplex, and
optic/electric conversion. If ONU has a main control unit in its service interface &
protocol processing module, and has the necessity of V5 protocol processing, then the
optical transmission module has to provide E1 channel using V5 protocol.
Power and environment monitoring module: the module accommodate primary power,
lightning protection box, battery, MDF and ESC. They are installed in different
functional modules in ONU depending on the actual needs. They do not form an
independent frame. This module monitors and manages environment status of ONU and
system power supply status.

17
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Note:
In general, BAM is not needed in ONU. It is managed by BAM in OLT. ONU and OLT communicate
with each other using internal protocol.
In cases when V-series ONU is configured in HONET system instead of OLT, a certain ONU is
connected to BAM to implement NM functions.
2.1.3 Optical Transmission System
OLT and ONU, ONU and ONU are connected through optical transmission equipment.
The optical transmission equipment can be built-in SDH 155/622H, or other standard
SDH and PDH system. OLT can network with ONU in multiple topological structures,
such as ring, tree, star and link.
Transmission module implements the following functions.
1)
2)
3)
Bearing V5 links between OLT and LE, or V series ONU and LE.
Bearing E1 links between main control unit and subscriber unit.
Bear broadband services: SDH equipment is used in HONET access system for
bearing ATM and IP services.
2.1.4 AN-NMS
AN-NMS is based on TCP/IP protocol. It features client/server structure.

AN-NMS monitors system configuration, maintenance, testing, alarm, performance
statistics collection, wireless management, transmission management, environment power
and CATV. It supports local and remote maintenance, as well as synchronous
maintenance of multiple systems.
Features of AN-NMS are as follows.
Comprehensive functions, easy operation and friendly interface.

System secure and configuration flexible
Can manage multiple equipment at the same time.
Realize distributed and modular management through centralized management.
Can be connected to local NM center through standard Q3 interface.
Have standard interface for 112 test system.
Can manage and maintain various equipment in the access network, such as
subscriber equipment and transmission equipment.
Can monitor and manage environment power supply.
Can manage data configuration at the subscriber interface.
Can manage the whole system running status.
Various of AN-NMS service console, including data console, test console, alarm console,
can be installed in one workstation, or multiple workstation in the LAN.
2.2 HONET Interfaces

2.2.1 UNI
ONU in the HONET access network provides UNI for access of multiple services.
Table 2-1 lists different UNIs in HONET system and the terminals which the UNIs are
interconnected to.
18
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 2-1 UNI types and the terminals interconnected

Equipment
UNI type
Interconnected equipment
Z interface
V.35.V.24
2B+D, 30B+D
ONU
E1 interface
U interface transparent transmission
E&M interface
VF dedicated line
Phone
Subscriber data terminal
Digital phone, digital terminal
E1 dedicated line
Equipment with U interface at the network side
and subscribe side
E&M trunk equipment
Modem with dedicated line, voice frequency phone
2.2.2 SNI
OLT in HONET access network provides SNI. Table 2-2 lists the SNI types and the
terminals interconnected.
Table 2-2 SNI types and the terminals interconnected
Equipment
SNI type
V5.2/V5.1
Interface in 2M dedicated line
OLT
Interconnected equipment
LE
DDN
I. V5 interface
V5 interface in HONET access network has the following features.
Can be interconnected with any switch with standard v5 interface.

Reliable. V5 protocol has dual-protection procedures, and signaling links on one
interface are in backup configuration.
High maintainability. It can implement local or remote maintenance, monitor in
real time V5 signaling and connection procedures.
Meet the requirement of IP service bypass in the access network.
Internet users in the access network can be connected to the ISP directly through
extended V5 interface protocol. It does not occupy service channels in V5 interface, so
that it avoids the impact of increasing Internet users on the network resources.
HONET provides standard V5 interface. It can be connected with switch with standard
V5 interface through the E1 interface in DTE/PV8/PV4 board.
II. DDN interface
Data access system (DAS) in HONET system implements DDN services. Table 2-3 lists
the various service interfaces in DAS.
Table 2-3 Data interfaces in DAS
Interface type
V.24
V.35
64kbit/s
FE1
2B1Q
Rate
Features
Subrate (synchronous rate and

asynchronous rate), 64kbit/s
N64kbit/s(N=1~31)
64kbit/s
N64kbit/s(N=1~31)
160kbit/s
In compliance with V.28. V.24.ISO2110(DB25)

In compliance with V.35. V.24.ISO2594(M34)
In compliance with G.703

19
Technical Manual
2.2.3 Maintenance Management Interface
Table of Contents
HONET access system provides multiple interfaces for comprehensive management and
maintenance, such as GUI NM interface, 112 interface, NML interface and Q3 interface.
2.3 Services Provisioning
As shown in Figure 2-4, HONET access network can be connected with different
subscriber equipment at the remote end, such as common phone, data terminal, ISDN
terminal, CATV. It implements integration of voice service, data service and video
service.
LAN
PSTN
2B+D/30B+D
G.SHDSL
Router
Twisted
pair
DDN
POTS
ISDN terminal
2 B+D
E1
HONET Integrated
Services Access Network
ISDN
DDN node
2/4-wire VF dedicated line

V.24/V.35
PSPDN
DTE
Coxial cable
Internet
CATV
E/Minterface
TV
10Base-T
Figure 2-4 Networking diagram of HONET access network
2.3.1 POTS
Apart from supporting analog voice services and service switching, HONET access
network also supports new services, such as Centrex, caller identification display (CID).
2.3.2 ISDN
HONET has ISDN BRA (2B+D) and ISDN PRA (30B+D) interface. It supports N-ISDN
service through 2B+D and 30B+D interface. Multiple rates and multiple bearing channels
can be enabled on 30B+D interface. 30B+D interface in OLT is realized by E1 interface
of DTE digital trunk board. In ONU, 30B+D interface is realized by E1 interface of
PV8/PV4, RSP and optical transmission system.
2.3.3 DDN Services
HONET system provides DDN services. Service interface can be at the rate of
2048kbit/s, N64kbit/s (N=1~31), 2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2kibt/s. Interface types include V.24,
V.35, 64k interface, FE1 (fractional E1), 2B1Q interface. By means of 2B1Q interface
technology, the transmission distance can be extended.
20
Technical Manual
2.3.4 IP Services
Table of Contents
HONET provides 10M Ethernet interface, as well as WAN interfaces with dynamic
adjustable bandwidth (N64kbit/s, N in range of 1~31).
2.3.5 Z Interface Extension
Z interface is an analog subscriber interface. Z interface extension service is also called

FXO-FXS service.
FXO and FXS interfaces are provided by CDI board and ASL board respectively.
FXO interface is connected with switch to implement connection between POTS
subscriber and LE or PBX.
Z interface extension is applicable for POTS service provisioning when LE/PBX does not
provide V5 interface. It is also applicable for small capacity and low cost of POTS
service provisioning when LE/PBX has V5 interface.
2.3.6 2/4 Line Voice Frequency Interface
VFB board in HONET provides 2/4 line voice frequency interface. VFB voice frequency
dedicated line is applicable for common 2/4 line voice frequency connection and Modem
connection. VFB board has no feeder. The interface impedance is 600 and 1650
compatible, and the level can be adjusted by software. The interface can be selected
between 2 line and 4 line.
2.3.7 2/4 Line E&M Interface
E&M trunk interface is a widely used trunk interface. Its signaling channel consists of
transmitting M line and receiving E line. It implements signaling conversion between
switch and transmission equipment through E line and M line which are separated from
voice channel.
2 line E&M interface transmits and receives signaling over one single pair of balanced
line. 4 line E&M interface transmits and receives signaling over one pair of balanced line
respectively.
HONET 2/4 line E&M interface belongs to Bell V series. It is provided by ATI board. It
forwards E&M signaling through voice TS using Huawei-defined protocol transparently.
2.3.8 CATV Services
HONET access network provides a cost-effective and flexible transmission solution to
CATV services. Built-in optical transmit module and optical receive module form an
independent CATV optical transmission system. CATV is subject to centralized
monitoring and network management.

21
Technical Manual
2.4 HONET System Features

2.4.1 Multiple Subscriber Interfaces
Table of Contents
Z interface, U interface (ISDN BRA 2B+D), 2/4 line voice frequency interface, ISDN
PRA (30B+D), V.24 subrate interface, V.24/V.35 64kbit/s interface, V.35/FE1
N64kbit/s interface, standard E1 interface, XDSL interface, LAN interface,2/4 line
E&M interface.
2.4.2 Intra-Frame Resource Sharing and Adjustable Convergence Ratio
Network resources of V series ONU can be shared among frames. ONU can b either
connected to LE through V5 interface, or connected to OLT by means of module cascade.
The convergence ratio is in range of 1:1~1:8, which provides a solution to large traffic
and traffic unbalanced distribution.
2.4.3 Upgrade and Scalability
Dynamic scalability ensures expansion of system capacity or deletion of certain

components without interrupting the normal operations. HONET is of modular structure.
Service types and capacity expansion can be implemented by adding boards, functional
components and stacking protocol processing modules.
HONET software patch can be loaded online, which facilitates function optimization. In
addition, software of part of the core boards can be upgraded online. Maintenance staff
can make the operation using MML commands or maintenance console.
2.4.4 Flexible Networking
Network topologies such as link, tree, star and ring are available. The ring network
topology features highly protective function. The built-in SDH optical transmission
equipment facilitates system networking greatly.
HONET module cascade and module interconnection changes the traditional star
topology with OLT in the center. V series ONU can be interconnected with each other
through dedicated line, making service access and networking easier. HONET system
makes full use of E1 resources, and is especially applicable for situations with large
volume of dedicated line services and complex networking.
2.4.5 V5 Interface
HONET has standard V5 interface in conformance with ITU-T recommendation G.964,

G.965, G.965 supplementary. It can be interconnected with any switch with standard V5
interface.
2.4.6 Integrated Access
HONET supports both cable access and wireless access. There are interfaces in both OLT
and ONU which are connected to wireless local loop system. HONET network system is
interoperable with wireless products by Huawei and products with V5 interface by other
22
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
manufacturers. HONET integrates both passive access technologies and active access
technologies.
2.4.7 Powerful Network Management

HONET NM implements centralized management on fault management, security
management, configuration management and performance management. HONET
systems can be managed and maintained in a unified way. HONET NMS has standard
112 interface, MML interface and Q3 interface for comprehensive subscriber line tests.
2.4.8 Reliable System Performance
All the key components in HONET system, such as the main control board and power
supply board, are in redundancy configuration. If the active board does fail, it would be
replace with a spare. BAM can back up the data automatically and periodically, to ensure
the reliable system performance. HONET access network has an error tolerance module,
which increases the impact of abnormal incidents on the system performance to the
minimum.
2.4.9 Abundant Product Series
HONET access network consists of abundant ONU series products to meet complex
applications and networking requirements.
The small capacity equipment includes ONU-60A, ONU-160A, ONU-160B,

ONU-F01A, and ONU-F01D100/200. The medium capacity equipment includes
ONU-F02A-U and ONU-F01D500/600. The large capacity equipment is ONUF02A-D, ONU-1000A.
In terms of application environment, there are indoor and outdoor series of
products. Outdoor series products are configured with main distribution frame,
power supply and battery. They are especially applicable for applications
without normal equipment room. In general, the ONU needs little on-site
maintenance.
V series of ONU can process V5 protocol directly, and R series ONU only
processes HGRP protocol.

23
Technical Manual
Table of Contents

24
Technical Manual
Chapter 3 System Composition

3.1 Summary
Table of Contents
HONET access network consists of optical line terminal (OLT) and optical network unit
(ONU). In terms of service functions, they consist of main control unit and subscriber
unit.
3.1.1 Introduction to OLT
Depending on the cabinet types, OLT can be divided into B-type OLT and 19-inch OLT.
B-type ONU cabinet is usually of combination cabinet, with the dimensions of
2100mm880mm550mm (HWD). The 19-inch cabinet is 2100mm680mm800mm
(HWD), in accordance with the IEC297 standard. Multiple cabinets can be combined
when necessary.
OLT is composed of host module (including main control unit or subscriber unit), optical
transmission module and background administration module (BAM). Figure 3-1 shows
the composition of OLT.
OLT
equipment
Host module
Main control
unit
GV5 main contrl uit

PV8 main control frame
Optical
transmission
module
Subscriber unit
OptiX 155/622B transmission frame
OptiX 155/622H transmission frame
PON-C transmission unit
PDH transmission frame
BAM
Figure 3-1 Composition of OLT
3.1.2 Introduction to ONU
ONU can be divided into different types, depending on the subscriber quantities and
applications. See Figure 3-2.

25
Technical Manual
ONU
equpipment
Table of Contents
ONU-60A
ONU-160A
ONU-F01A
ONU-F02A
ONU-160B
ONU-F01D100
ONU-F01D200
ONU-F01D500
ONU-F01D600
ONU-F01D1000
Figure 3-2 ONU classifications
Table 3-1 lists the performance of various ONUs.

Table 3-1 List of various ONUs
ONU type
ONU-60A
ONU-160A
ONU-F01A-U
ONU-F02A-U
ONU-F02A-D
ONU-160B
ONU-F01D100
ONU-F01D200
ONU-F01D500
ONU-F01D600
ONU-F01D1000
Max. subscribers supported

64
80/160
160/320
624
1072
80/160
160
288
704
896
1248
Application
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
With built-in MDF and battery or

not
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note:
The maximum subscribers refer to the quantities that a single cabinet supports using 16-channel
subscriber board.
When using 32-channel subscriber board, ONU-160B can support up to 160 subscribers.
ONU consists of protocol processing module, optical transmission module, power supply
& environment monitoring module.
3.2 Optical Line Terminal (OLT)
OLT processes voice, data and video services at the network side. It provides various SNI
to connect with SNs, such as the V5 interface for connecting with LE. OLT is connected
with ONU via one or more than one optical distribution network (ODN). It maintains and
manages ONU. OLT processes protocols in V5 interface, and transmits services to
26
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
various ONUs over ODN. OLT is generally located in the interface of LE. It can also be
placed at remote end to be connected with LE through transmission equipment.
3.2.1 Physical Configuration of OLT
An OLT is composed of the following 4 basic modules: Service Interface and Protocol
Processing (SIPP) module, optical transmission module, CATV module and back
administrative module (BAM). The basic structure of OLT is shown in Figure 3-3.
CATV signal
CATV moduel
V5.2
LE
DDN
E1
SIPP
module
NM
E1
Optical
transmission
module
BAM
Figure 3-3 Basic structure of OLT
3.2.2 Composition and Function of Each Module in OLT
I. Service interface and protocol processing (SIPP) module
SIPP module has the following three functions: service port function (SPF), core function
(CF) and user port function (UPF). Figure 3-4 is the functional block diagram of SIPP
module.
E1 link transparent
transimission
V5
LE
DDN
E1 link or
optical
transmission
Protocol
processing
main
control
unit
E1 link or
optical
transmission
E1 link
RS422 level
differential link
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of SIPP module

27
Subscriber unit
Subscriber unit
Subscriber unit
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
In hardware, SIPP module is divided into protocol processing main control unit and
subscriber unit.
1)
Protocol processing control unit implements SPF and CF functions, i.e. enabling
service access and distribution, and providing SNI with various SNs. Generally,
SN is LE or DDN node. SIPP is connected with LE or DDN node through E1
links. Service interconnection is enabled between SIPP and LE through V5
interface. That between DDN node and SIPP is enabled through E1 interface. It
functions as SPF in this way.
Subscriber unit mainly performs UPF function to provide subscriber terminals
with various services.
Protocol processing control unit and subscriber unit can be in the same location
or different location. When they are in the same location, they are connected
through E1 lines or RS422 links. When they are in the different locations, they
are connected through E1 links provided by transmission equipment
transparently. Service interconnection between the control unit and subscriber
unit is realized by HGRP specified by Huawei.
Protocol processing control unit
Protocol processing control unit mainly completes the functions of interface switching,
protocol processing, main control, digital cross connection, clock phase locking and
distribution etc. It is the core part of HONET. Its functional block diagram is shown in
Figure 3-5.
Management interface
E1 link
E1 interface
V5
Protocol
processing
DXC, clock
phase lock
& allocation
E1 link
E1 interface
HGRP or V5
RS422
differential
interface
HGRP
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of protocol processing control unit
Protocol processing control unit converts E1 signal at LE into the internal signal through
E1 interface, and send the signal to subscriber unit through E1 interface or differential
interface after protocol processing and timeslot cross processing etc. At the same time, it
abstracts the active clock from the network and provides the clock to this unit after phase
locking and completes the transfer of clock through E1 interface and differential
interface. Protocol processing unit provides a management interface, and is subject to the
management of HONET management module.
2)
Subscriber Unit
The subscriber unit is divided into the main control part, the subscriber interface part and
the test part.
Main control part
The main control part performs the functions of interface signal switching, protocol
processing, equipment management, clock phase locking and distribution etc.
Subscriber interface part

28
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
The subscriber interface part is directly connected with the user terminal to provide
various services.
Test part
The test part is used for conventional test of subscriber interface so as to guarantee the
stability of the system operation.
Services from SN are transmitted to subscriber unit after being processed by main control
unit through E1 or differential signals. Main control part of the subscriber unit converts
the E1 or differential signals into TTL signals, and distributed to subscriber interface
through data bus. Test unit makes normal tests of the subscriber interface, and outputs the
test results to the main control unit through test bus. Figure 3-6 shows the function block
diagram of subscriber unit.
E1link or 422 differential link

Interface function
Clock phase and allocation
Equipment managment
Protocol processing
Serial data bus
Control bus
Subscriber
interface
Subscriber
interface
Subscriber
interface
........
Subscriber
interface
Test
unit
Test bus
Subscriber cable
Subscriber cable
Subscriber cable
Subscriber cable
Figure 3-6 Functional block diagram of the subscriber unit
To sum up, SIPP module is the service-processing core of HONET. It contains the main
control unit and subscriber unit, and performs the functions of system control, V5
protocol processing, system timing and user access etc.
Specifically speaking, it includes the following types:
Main control unit: GV5 main control frames, and PV8 main control frame
(integrating the functions of the main control unit and the subscriber unit).
Subscriber unit: RSP subscriber frame
SIPP in OLT is generally GV5-III frame. They are connected with LE through V5
interface, to enable service access and process V5 protocol. When it is necessary for OLT
to provide subscriber interface, subscriber unit, such as RSP subscriber frame, RSA
subscriber frame can be configured. In dedicated network, SIPP can also be PV8 frame.
Quantity of the main control frame and ONU subscriber frame can be added according
the requirement.
II. Optical transmission module
Optical transmission module can be embedded with SDH equipment (such as

Optix155/622H, Optix155/622B), PON-16 or APDH68M. Components of optical
29
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
transmission module vary with different optical transmission equipment. For detailed
information about the compositions, please refer to the description of respective
transmission equipment. Optical transmission module can be in an independent frame.
III. CATV module
CATV module is composed of transmitter and receiver sub-modules, monitoring submodule, CATV power supply, necessary WDM and optical splitter. CATV module
converts electrical signals from the broadcast television center into optical signals and
sent them to each ONU through optical fibers. Special CATV optical module completes
single modulation and optical-electric conversion. One CATV module in OLT occupies
one frame.
IV. Back administration module (BAM)
BAM is embedded in OLT to provide NM interface. BAM is composed of an industrial

computer and MCP card, multi-serial port card, network card and MODEM card etc.
BAM serves as a bridge between service consoles and system equipment. A BAM
occupies a frame.
3.2.3 Characteristics of OLT
I. Large Capacity
When the GV5-III main control frame is connected with ONU, it can provide services to
10000 subscribers. (calculated on the condition that the traffic of each subscriber line is
no less than 0.7 Erl).
II. High Integrity
GV5-III features high integrity and compactness. It uses AV5 board as the main control
board. Each GV5-III frame supports 8 DTE boards, providing 62 E1 links and can be
distributed flexibly. It can provide up to 32 independent V5 interfaces.
III. High Reliability
Active/standby or load-sharing operation mode is adopted for those critical boards, such
as the main control board in OLT and the power board. In case one board is faulty, the
system can still work normally, which greatly increases the reliability of system
operation.
IV. Modularization
Modularization design is adopted in the system. System capacity can be increased

through adding service boards or superimposing modules.
3.2.4 Description of SIPP Functional Modules
I. GV5 Main Control Frame
GV5 frame implements SPF and CF functions to enable service access and process
protocols. GV5 is installed in OLT, consisting of AV5 main control board, trunk board
and backplane frame. Trunk board has E1 interface to connect with LE or service node. It
30
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
can also be connected with ONU through transparent transmission equipment, to

implement service distribution. AV5 processes V5 protocol, manages and controls the
whole equipment.
The GV5 main control frame mainly adopted currently is GV5-III.
Figure 3-7 shows the functional block diagram of GV5 main control frame.
NM serial port
High-precision clock
Clock frame
A
V
5
E1 line clock
V
5
Data bus
Control bus
D
T
E
T
E
T
E
E1
E1
T
E
E1
E1
LE
Subscriber frame
Figure 3-7 Functional block diagram of GV5 main control frame
One frame of GV5 main control frame is configured with two AV5 boards in
active/standby mode. The active AV5 board monitors DTE boards and the standby AV5
board through control bus, and is subject to the unified management of AN-NMS through
network management serial interface.
AV5 uses the line clock extracted from DTE as the system clock in its frame. It provides
DTE E1 links to connect with ONU subscriber frame, functioning as the phase clock
source of ONU subscriber frame. For applications where high-precision clock is
demanded, AV5 board can receive the clock of the optional clock frame.
II. Subscriber Frame
The subscriber frame provides UPF. It consists of main control board, service interface
board, secondary power board and backplane frame. There are different kinds of service
interface boards, which provide different service interface. The main control board is
connected the main control frame through E1 interface or RS422 differential interface. It
provides channels for bearing services. The main control board manages service boards
in ONU subscriber frame. It reports the service status to the main control frame, which
then issues operation commands. The subscriber frame communicates with main control
frame through Huawei private protocol HGRP.
There are two kinds of subscriber frame, i.e. RSP and RSA. For detailed information
about these frames, refer to the descriptions in ONU Functional Units.

31
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
III. PV8 Main Control Frame
For description of PV8 frame, refer to PV8 Frame in ONU.
3.3 Optical Network Unit (ONU)
ONU is a remote end equipment on the subscriber side in HONET. It processes optical
signals and provides subscribers with various service interfaces. Optical interface is on its
network side and electrical interface is on the subscriber side. It has the functions of
optical/electrical and electrical/optical conversion, multiplexing and demultiplexing,
protocol processing and maintenance management etc. It can perform digital/analog and
analog/digital conversion of voice signal. In addition, it provides optical relay function.
ONU accepts management information from OLT and reports to OLT the various
statuses of subscribers and equipment through the transmission system.
3.3.1 Physical Configurations of ONU
Similar to OLT, ONU consists of the following modules: Service interface and protocol
processing (SIPP) module, optical transmission module, CATV module, power and
environment monitoring module. The biggest difference between ONU and OLT is that
ONU is located in the subscriber side. In addition, they are somewhat different in
configurations of the basic modules. Basic structures of ONU is shown in Figure 3-8.
Video
terminal
CATV module
Monitor
Optical
transmission
module
E1
SIPP
module
Phone
terminal
Data
terminal
Power and environment

monitoring module
Figure 3-8 Basic structures of ONU
3.3.2 Composition and Function of Each Basic Module in ONU

I. SIPP module
Composition of SIPP module in ONU is basically the same as that of OLT. The
difference is that the main control unit of SIPP in ONU does not have GV5 main control
frame. Instead, it uses PV8 main control frame or RSP subscriber frame to provide the
related subscriber interfaces.
When ONU has PV8 frame, it can be directly connected with LE through V5 interface.

32
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
II. Optical transmission module
Similar to the optical transmission module in OLT, ONU can be equipped with built-in
transmission equipment (such as SDH Optix155/622H), PON-16, and Optix155C.
Components of optical transmission module vary with different optical transmission
equipment. For detailed information about the compositions, please refer to the
description of respective transmission equipment. Optical transmission frame occupies
one separate frame, with the exception of Optix155C which occupies just one slot.
The optical transmission module performs the functions of multiplexing, demultiplexing
and optical/electrical conversion, and provides E1 channels for the subscriber unit in the
ONU SIPP. When SIPP module in ONU contains the main control unit, and has to be
capable of processing V5 protocol, the optical transmission module have to provide the
main control unit with E1 channel with V5 protocol.

III. CATV module
CATV module is composed of transmitter and receiver sub-modules, monitoring submodule, CATV power supply, necessary WDM and optical splitter. One CATV module
in OLT occupies a frame. CATV module converts electrical signals from OLT or upperlayer ONU into optical signals and provides subscribers with CATV services through
CAVT distribution network.
IV. Power and environment monitoring module
Power and environment monitoring module includes the primary power, lightning
protection box, battery, MDF and ESC. They are installed in different functional modules
in ONU depending on the actual needs. They do not form an independent frame. Power
and environment monitoring module provides power supply for the system and monitors
the system.
Note:
In general, BAM is not needed in ONU. It is managed by BAM in OLT. ONU communicates with OLT
using internal protocol. In special occasions, such as in the electrical dedicated network, V series of
ONU is configured instead of OLT. In such case, certain ONU is connected with the BAM to implement
NM.
3.3.3 Characteristics of ONU
I. Rich networking applications
When only subscriber unit of SIPP module is configured in ONU, the ONU does not
facilitate SIPP main control unit. Such ONU is called R series ONU. R series ONU is
incapable of 64kbit/s cross connection and V5 protocol processing. Its services are
connected to OLT or V series ONU through E1 links. The OLT or V series ONU
implements V5 processing and semi-permanent connections.
When ONU is configured with PV8 main control frame, it is called V series ONU. V
series ONU is capable of 64kbit/s cross connection, V5 protocol processing, system
timing and NM. It can be directly connected with LE or other ONU. It can also be

33
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
connected to OLT by means of module cascade. V series ONU integrates main control
unit and subscriber unit, which breaks the traditional star networking topology of AN
with OLT in the center.
II. Abundant subscriber interface
ONU provides multiple subscriber interfaces to support voice, data and video services. It
enables the carriers to provide integrated services in one access platform. The interfaces
available include Z interface, U interface (ISDN BRA 2B+D), 2/4 line voice frequency
interface, ISDN PRA (30B+D), V.24 subrate interface, V.24/V.35 64kbit/s interface,
V.35/FE1 N64kbit/s interface, 2/4 line E&M interface, E1 interface, XDSL, CATV
interface.
III. High reliability
Master and standby boards or load sharing operation mode is adopted for the key boards
of ONU main control board and power supply board etc. When one board appears fault,
the system can still work normally, which greatly increases the reliability of system
operation.
IV. Built-in SDH/PON Optical Transmission System
According to user'
s requirement, equipment from other vendors can be used for AN
transmission (External optical transmission); HONET built-in optical transmission
equipment can be used as well. It includes the transmission equipment of
OptiX155/622H, OptiX155C and PON-16 etc. Built-in SDH/PON optical transmission
system makes ONU structure more compact. Whats more, it increases the system
flexibility and self-healing capability, and provides the ability of smooth transition
towards broadband service.
V. Perfect monitoring of environment & power supply
To ensure reliable operation and easy maintenance of remote ONU, HONET provides
function of monitoring environment & power supply. It monitors the temperature,
humidity, access control, primary power supply, storage battery, cable distribution frame
and fan. Meanwhile, it has extended I/O interface to monitor smog, water leakage and air
conditioner. Environment power supply monitoring console of AN-NMS is connected to
BAM over Ethernet. It monitors environment parameters of all network elements in real
time.
VI. Modular structure
ONU adopts modular design, including SIPP module, CATV module, optical
transmission module, power supply module, and environment monitoring module. The
module design facilitates the module selection and capacity expansion, as well as service
distribution and subscriber access.
VII. Complete ONU series products
In terms of capacity, HONET consists of small-capacity ONU-60A, ONU-160A, ONU160B, ONU-F01A, ONU-F01D100/200, medium-capacity ONU-F01D500, and ONUF02A-U, and large-capacity ONU-F02A-D and ONU-F01D600/1000.

34
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
In terms of application environment, HONET consists of indoor ONU and outdoor ONU.
Among which, ONU-60A, ONU-160A, ONU-F01A, ONU-F02A are indoor ONU, while
ONU-160B (used in most areas), and ONU-F01D series (used in extreme cold/hot areas)
are outdoor ONU.
In terms of service processing and networking, ONU consists of R series and V series.
3.3.4 Description of Functional Units
I. PV8 main control frame
PV8 integrates the functions of main control unit and subscriber unit. PV8 frame is used
in V series ONU.
The subscriber boards transmit the services to PV8 board through HW data bus. The
services are then converged to service nodes after protocol processing and time slot cross
connection. Active PV8 board monitors the subscriber boards, test board and standby
PV8 board through control bus. It is subject to NM management via the NM serial port.
TSS tests the subscriber boards through test bus, and feeds the test results to the PV8
board through control bus.
Figure 3-9 shows the functional block diagram of PV8 frame
E1 interface
NE serial port
P
V
8
H
W
C
P
V
8
Differential interface
Data bus
Control bus
A
S
L
A
S
L
A
S
L
T
S
S
Test bus
Subscriber cable
Figure 3-9 Functional block diagram of PV8 main control frame
PV8 frame outputs 32 differential HW by HWC board to connect with RSP subscriber
boards. Up to 8 RSP subscriber boars are supported, 4 or 8 HW for each board. E1
resources are shared among PV8 frame and RSP extended subscriber frames, thus to save
HW resources.
II. RSP subscriber frame
RSP subscriber frame is used in ONU. To meet cabinets with different dimensions, it has
three dimensions. RSP-19 subscriber frame , RSP-10 and RSP-14 subscriber frames.

35
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
In remote working mode, RSP subscriber frame is connected directly with GV5 main
control frame or transmission equipment through the E1 interface on RSP board. RSP
distributes the services from the main control frame to various subscriber boards through
HW data bus, and the services then sent to the subscriber terminals.
The two RSP boards, working in the load-sharing mode, control the boards in the frame
through the control bus. Meanwhile, they are subject to the management of the main
control frame.
TSS board implements routine test of the subscriber boards through the test bus and
reports the results to RSP board through the control bus.
In the quasi-near-end operating mode, the RSP subscriber frame is connected to PV8
main control frame via differential interface of RSP. PV8 frame controls and manages the
RSP subscriber frame. Its working is similar to the remote operating mode.
The functional block diagram of RSP subscriber frame is shown in Figure 3-10.
E1 interface
R
S
P
Differential interface
R
S
P
Data bus
Control bus
A
S
L
A
S
L
A
S
L
T
S
S
Test bus
Subscriber cable
Figure 3-10 Functional block diagram of the RSP subscriber frame

36
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Subscriber Interface and Services Implementation .................................................. 38
4.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 38
4.2 Major Boards and Service Interface Types......................................................................... 38
4.3 POTS Services ................................................................................................................... 40
4.4 ISDN Integrated Services ................................................................................................... 41
4.5 Data Services...................................................................................................................... 41
4.5.1 Summary .................................................................................................................. 41
4.5.2 Implementation of Service Access in HONET.......................................................... 43
4.6 Internet Services ................................................................................................................. 49
4.6.1 IP Access and LAN Interconnection......................................................................... 50
4.6.2 IP Bypass ................................................................................................................. 50
4.7 Z Interface Extension .......................................................................................................... 53
4.7.1 2/4-line VF Private Line Interface............................................................................. 53
4.7.2 2/4 Line E&M Interface............................................................................................. 54
4.8 CATV Access ...................................................................................................................... 56

37
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Subscriber Interface and Services

Implementation
4.1 Introduction
HONET integrated service AN provide various types of services. It can be connected to

equipment like phones, data terminal, ISDN terminal and CATV unit etc. Thus it
implements integration of voice, data and video services. See Figure 4-1.
LAN
PSTN
G.SHDSL
Router
2B+D/30B+D
Twisted
pair
DDN
POTS
ISDN terminal
2 B+D
E1
ISDN
HONET Integrated
Services Access Network
DDN node
2/4-wire VF dedicated line

V.24/V.35
PSPDN
DTE
Coxial cable
Internet
CATV
E/Minterface
TV
10Base-T
Figure 4-1 Accessible services provided by HONET integrated service AN
This chapter describes various user interfaces that are provided by HONET first. Then, it
describes the implementation of these services.
4.2 Major Boards and Service Interface Types

Table 4-1 lists the major boards and service interfaces in HONET.
Table 4-1 Major boards and service interfaces
Board
name
Service type
AV5
Main control board
PV8/PV4
Main control board
RSP
subscriber frame
control board
Board feature
It is the main processing board in OLT GV5 frame. It processes V5 protocol. Two AV5
boards work in active/standby mode.
It is the main processing board in V series ONU. It processes V5 protocol. PV8/PV4
board provides 8 E1 and 4 E1 interfaces respectively. PV8/PV4 boards support hot
backup, and work in active/standby mode (except E1 interfaces).
It is in the subscriber frame. RSP0 RSPA provides 4XE1, 1E1 respectively.
RSPB does not provide E1, and is used in the extension frame of V series ONU.
Two RSP boards work in loading sharing mode.
38
Technical Manual
Board
name
SCS
TSS
PWC
PWX
H302ESC
H303ESC
Table of Contents
Service type
Sub-rate
Concentrating
Switch Board
Subscriber line test
board
Secondary power
supply board
Secondary power
supply board
Environment power
supply monitor
board
Environment power
supply monitor
board
ASL
PSTN
DSL
ISDN-BRI
DTE
ISDN-PRI
CB02VFB
2/4-wire VF
CDI
Direct dial in/FXO

interface
ATI
2/4 Line E&M

Interface
Board feature
It supports cross connection of X.50 protocol compatible packets. Up to 560 packets in 28
64kbit/s time slot are supported.
It provides function of cross connection. Rates available include 2.4kbit/s, 4.8kbit/s, and
9.6kbit/s.
19.2kbit/s
It is used for analog subscriber interface (z interface) and digital subscriber interface (U
interface) test.
It provides power supply of 5V/20A for OLT GV5 frame. Two PWC boards work in loading
sharing mode.
It provides power supply for subscriber frame and PV8 frame. CC03PWX provides
+5V/10A, -5V/5A, 75VAC/0.4A power supply. CC04PWX provides+5V/30A, -5V/10A,
75VAC/0.4A power supply. H301PWX provides +5V 30A, -5V 10A, 75VAC/1A power
supply. Three PWX boards work in loading sharing mode.
It monitors ambient temperature, humidity, fan, access control, fan, MDF, primary power
supply and battery.
It can also monitor CATV and AMS-2 through serial port.
It monitors ambient temperature, humidity, fan, access control, fan, MDF.
It can also monitor CATV, intelligent power equipment and AMS-2 through serial port.
It can be connected to 6 analog sensors and 16 Boolean sensors externally.
Each board provides 16 channels / 32 channels of POTS interfaces.
It implements BORSCHT function,
as well as special functions such as long-distance feeding, CID and charging pulse.
It supports both A law and law.
The transmission distance of subscriber line may be up to 5km (long distance subscriber
board, 8km).
Each board provides 8-channel ISDN-RBI.
The interface board accomplishes functions of the U interface line terminal (LT) of ISDN
and functions of layers 1 and 2 of the ISDN function module.
It provides remote feeding, protection and test function.
The transmission distance of subscriber line can reach 5km.
The board provides 2-channel/8-channel E1 interface, supporting IDSN-PRI services.
Conform to ITU 1.431 Proposal, the board fulfills functions of ISDN-PRI physical layer
while the main control unit performs the functions of high layer.
It processes main control unit.
The board can also be used for other purposes, such as providing V5 bearer channel.
Each board provides 16 2-wire voice frequency interfaces or 8 4-wire voice frequency
interfaces.
Selection of 2 wire or 4 wire VF interface is set by software.
The impedance of 2 wire and 4 wire can be set as 600 or 1650.
It uses A law PCM, conforming to ITU-T Recommendation G.711.
Audio frequency index conforms to ITU-T Recommendation G.712.
Receiving and transmitting gains can be set by software. The receiving and transmitting
gains of 2 wire are 7~2dB and 5~0dB respectively.
The receiving and transmitting gains of 4 wire are 11~4dB and 1~+14dB respectively.
Each board provides 16 interfaces (2 wire); A/ law
It is in compliance with ITU-T Recommendation G711. The interface impedance is 600.
Receiving and transmitting gains can be set by software. The receiving / transmitting
gains are 22~3dB, -8.5~+13dB respectively.
Each board provides 6-channel 2/4 wire E&M interfaces.
It uses A law PCM, in compliance with TU-T Recommendation G.711.
Audio frequency index conforms to ITU-T Recommendation G.712.
Receiving and transmitting gains can be set by software. The receiving / transmitting
gains are 20~+1.5dB and 7~14dB respectively.

39
Technical Manual
Board
name
Table of Contents
Service type
MST
Magnetic interface
SRX
Subrate data
service
DDU
64K digital unit
H302HSL
Super rate data

service
H303HSL
Super rate data

service
MTA
Remote access of
data services
MLC
2B1Q interface
ILR
Analog CATV
Board feature
This board provides 4-channel 2-wire magnetic interface and 4-channel4-wire interface to
connect with the VF interfaces of VFB board.
In coordination with VFB board, it implements the conversion of 25Hz ringing signals and
2100Hz inband signals.
Each board provides 5-channel V.24 synchronous interfaces or 3-channel V.24
asynchronous interfaces.
The rates can be synchronous / asynchronous 2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2kbit/s, synchronous 48bit/s,
which are multiplexed according to ITU-T Recommendation X.50.
X.50 multiplexing
The interfaces are synchronous / asynchronous compatible, which is set by the software.
The reliable transmission distance of port can reach 30m.
Each DDU2 (unidirectional 64kbit/s) board provides two channel 64kbit/s.
The reliable transmission distance of port can reach 30m.
Each board provides two V.35 interfaces and two E1/ FE1 interfaces.
The rate is N64kbit/s, N in range of 1~31, including 1 and 31.The maximum value of N is
25 when the service is transmitted over HW. That of N is 31 when service is transmitted
over FE.
It can share the bandwidth with other interface boards in the subscriber frame, or can be
directly accessed in the data service node through the EI interface.
The reliable transmission distance of V.35 port reaches 30m.
FE1 meets the ITU-T Recommendation G.703. The maximum distance can reach 300m in
75 coaxial mode and 1000m in 120 shielded twisted pair mode.
Each board provides two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces.
The two SHDSL interfaces can carry N64kbit/s service data traffic by providing two V.35
or FE1 interfaces after the Modem processing. N in range of 1~31, including 1 and 31.
The subscriber data carries on SHDSL can be switched to RSP/PV8 via HW, and then
sent to the transmission equipment through the unified E1 line, or through the E1 interface
on the board. When HW is used, the max. available rate of V.35/FE1 is 2864kbit/s,
whereas when E1 line is used, the max. rate is 3164kbit/s.
It is connected to the interface board in the subscriber frame through 2B1Q interface. The
maximum distance is 5Km using 0.4mm copper wire.
It has a V.24/V.35 compatible interface, and 2 V.24 interfaces.
The rate includes subrates (2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2kbit/s), 64kbit/s and 128kbit/s.
The subrate interface is synchronous and asynchronous compatible, which is set by the
software.
It has one E1 interface.
8-channel U interface are connected with 8 MTA terminals respectively, realizing the
maximum transmission distance of 3~5km in V.24/V.35 data interface.
It is inserted in the CATV unit of an ONU to convert CATV optical signals into electric
signals.
Impedance of the electric interface is 75. Its frequency is 50~750MHz.
In addition, built-in transmission equipment such as SDH, PON or APDH provides E1

leased lines. For the interface characteristics, refer to the descriptions on the transmission
equipment.
4.3 POTS Services

HONET supports the access of both analog subscribers and subscriber exchange as well,
as shown in Figure 4-2. It also supports new services, such as Centrex and CID etc. The
user signaling can be dual tone multiple frequency (DTMF) or line state signals. There is
no limit on the subscriber'
s supplementary services.

40
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Twisted line
Z/V5
LE
POTS
ONU
OLT
Figure 4-2 POTS service access
4.4 ISDN Integrated Services

HONET provides ISDN BRI 2B+D) and ISDN PRI 30B+D) interface, as shown in
Figure 4-3. It supports N-ISDN services through IDSN interfaces, such as video
conference, videotext, G4 fax, E-mail, data information retrieval, LAN interconnection
and Internet access etc. It also supports the hybrid configuration of ISDN subscribers and
analog telephone subscribers. 25 ISDN supplementary services are available, including
Direct Dial In (DDI), Multi-subscriber Number (MSN) and Calling Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP).
LE
( C&C08)
OLT
V5.1/V5.2
ONU
30B+D terminal
30B+D
POTS
2 B+D
2B+
D/3
0B
+D
2B+D terminal
NT1
ISDN router
LAN
Figure 4-3 ISDN service access
4.5 Data Services

4.5.1 Summary
The data service described in this section refers to the traditional narrow band data
service including digital data network (DDN), packet switched public data network
(PSPDN) and frame relay (FR). These networks are cross penetrated and complement
with each other. Meanwhile, they also complement with public switched
telecommunication network and mobile communication network.
The bottom three layers in OSI model mainly concern the information transmission.
Therefore, these layers are called communication subnet. Communication subnet enables
data services.
Technologies used in data communications include circuit switching and packet
switching technologies. For example, DDN uses the circuit switching technology, and
PSPDN, frame relay (FR), TCP/IP-based LAN or WAN use the packet switching
technology.
In access network, service provisioning is based on the technologies of transparent
application of circuit switching or packet switching. Transparent transmission is not
applicable for DDN services only. In a sense, it is applicable for all types of services due
to its transparency. In the following section, the characteristics of various communication

41
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
technologies are introduced first. Then the implementations of these services are
discussed.
I. Digital data network
DDN transmits data signals over semi-permanent circuits. Using the synchronous time
division multiplexing (TDM) and circuit switching technology, DDN provides permanent
or semi-permanent digital dedicated connection to transmit data information
transparently. It features low delay and low bit error rate in the end to point transmission.
It is widely used in financial institutes, administration, transportation, large groups to
provide high quality leased lines. It enables LAN interconnection and establishment of
virtual private network (VPN). Moreover, DDN can be used for trunk transmission and
user access of networks such as packet network, Internet and frame relay.
DDN consists of digital channel, DDN node, network management system (NMS) and
user loop. The network architecture features multi-level, just like the PSTN architecture.
DDN provides the following services:
Basic services: private services Private services include the point-to-point or

point-to-multipoint private services at rate of E1, N 64kbit/s (N in range of
1~31), subrates of 2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2kbit/s.
Supplementary services: frame trunk, compressed voice and fax.
II. Packet-switched network
Packet-switched network uses multiplexing technology, in that subscribers share the

bandwidth resources. It features strict error detection and correction, flow control and
reliable transmission. Architecture of the packet-switched network corresponds to the
bottom three layers in OSI model. The detailed technological implementations are
defined by a series of protocols with X.25 protocol as the core. Therefore the packetswitched network is also called X.25 network.
Packet network is used for communication of PC and PC, PC and terminal, terminal and
terminals which are with different rates and procedures. The interface is in compliance
with V.24, V.35. Interfaces available include X.28, X.25 and X.32. X.28 and X.25 are
applicable for dedicated line access, and X.32 for dial-up access.
III. Frame relay
Frame relay is a data transmission technology using X.25 protocol. It is oriented for
frames with variable length. FR provides an optimal solution to the transition from the
existing public communication network to ATM network.
FR consists of permanent virtual circuit (PVC) and switched virtual circuit (SVC).
Currently, FR carriers only provide PVC services. FR is used for LAN interconnection,
multi-media services provisioning, virtual dedicated network.
IV. HONET DAS system
In the past, data services were transmitted mostly over copper cable. The service scale is
upgraded by adding new service nodes. Such means gets in the way of network
development. For one thing, the optical resources are wasted. Another thing, adding new
services increases the equipment cost. Development of access network provides a
solution to these problems.

42
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
The data service access is implemented by the Data Access system (DAS) in the HONET
integrated services AN. DAS efficiently solves the covering problem of data network
networking and solves the problems of service v.s cost. DAS has the following features.
Multiple subscriber interface HONET DAS supports services at rate of

0.6k~2Mbit/s. The interfaces available include E1, FE1, V.24, V.35, 2B1Q, 2/4
wire VF interface. With 2B1Q interface technology in coordination with MTA
equipment, DAS enables service access in long distance. DAS can function as
service node in the network terminal making use of its multiple interfaces, thus
to realize large area of service coverage at low costs.
Flexible networking capability HONET can form networking of all data services,
or integration of voice services and data services. Depending on the system
clock condition, DAS can work independently or otherwise. If clock systems of
PSTN and DDN networks are synchronized, voice boards and data boards can
be inserted interchangeably. It features high integrity and easy scalability. If the
clocks of PSTN and DDN are not synchronized, an independent DAS system
can be used to provide data services.
Object-oriented network management: there is a problem when voice services
and DDN services are integrated in the access network. DAS implements
hierarchical management on data services. In way of such hierarchical NM
maintenance, maintenance department has the highest priority. It can maintain
and operate with all kinds of equipment or services. The data office can only
configure, maintain and operate with data services, or monitors the alarms of
data services.
Overall maintenance means: users can have an understanding of the system
resource utilization. DAS provides link maintenance means for the ease of fault
location. It also allows loopback of multiple links, interfaces and time slot, which
is beneficial for test of line bit error. The complete NMS is ideal for maintenance
of data services specifically, as well as the other services in AN.
In a word, HONET DAS is an effective and cost-effective means to narrowband services

provisioning. It can take place of the terminal node in the access network. In network
architecture, DAS overcomes the shortcomings of the network constructed based on
services types. DAS is beneficial for network architecture optimization and smooth
transition from narrowband network to broadband network.
4.5.2 Implementation of Service Access in HONET

I. System principle
Access of data services in HONET is implemented by the DAS. Figure 4-4, shows DAS
components.
OLT/ONU
Node
SNI
SNI
processing
module
ONU
Transmission
module
UNI
processing
module
NM module
Figure 4-4 Diagram of DAS components

43
UNI Subscriber
data
equipment
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
SNI processing module: it provides service interface for interconnection with

service node. It enables SPF. This module can be located in OLT or ONU.
Some of its components can be used for other services.
UNI processing module: it provides subscriber interface for interconnection with
data terminals. It enables UPF. This module is located in ONU. Part of its
components can be used for provisioning of other services too.
Transport function module: provides the transport function, which connects SNI
and UNI processing modules. It can be shared with other services.
Network management function module:: provides the interface through which
the whole DAS is managed. It is actually part of whole AN-NMS.
II. System Structure
SNI and UNI module in DAS is composed by control unit and interface unit respectively.
The control unit is the same as that of processing PSTN services. They are
interchangeable. Interface unit consists of a series of interface boards, which provides
multiple data interfaces. As shown in Table 4-2, service interface can be at the rate of E1,
N64kbit/s (N in range of 1~31), 2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2kibt/s. Interface types include V.24
(synchronous or asynchronous), V.35, 64k interface, FE1 (fractional E1), 2B1Q interface.
Short distance of user access can be achieved. In addition, the 2B1Q interface technology
enables long distance of service transmission.
Table 4-2 Data interfaces in HONET
Interface type
V.24
V.35
Same directional
64kbit/s
FE1
2B1Q
Rate
Features
Subrate (synchronous rate and

asynchronous rate), 64kbit/s
N64kbit/s
In compliance with
V.28.V.24.ISO2110(DB25)
In compliance with V.35.V.24.ISO2594(M34)
64kbit/s
In compliance with G0.703
N64kbit/s
160kbit/s
In compliance with G0.703

The features of some boards are described below:

1)
SRX (subrate Multiplexer)
2)
HSL (High Speed Line Card )
SRX can implement multiplexing of up to 5-channel subrate services to 64kbit/s services.

Each SRX board can provide 5-channel synchronous DCE ports, supporting subrate
services at 2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2/48kbit/s etc, or provide 3-channel asynchronous DCE ports,
supporting subrate at 2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2kbit/s. Electrical characteristics of the synchronous
and asynchronous ports provided by SRX board comply with ITU-T Recommendation
V.28. The functional characteristics comply ITU-T Recommendation V.24.
HSL board can provide 2-channel DCE interface and 2-channel FE1 interface. The rate is
N64kbit/s, N in range of 1~31. Subscribers at short distance are connected to HSL board
through V.35 interfaces. If the access rate is slow, the services will be transmitted over
optical fiber through system HW. If the rate is fast, the services will be transmitted over
optical fiber through the FEI interface, so as to save subscriber resources. Remote
subscribers are recommended to get access through FEI interface in compliance with
ITU-T Recommendation G.703.

44
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Note:
When services are transmitted using system HW, the maximum rate at V.35 interface can reach
2564kbit/s. When services are transmitted through FE1 interface, service rate at V.35 interface can
reach 3164kbit/s.
3)
DDU (digital data unit: 64K digital unit)
4)
Multifunctional terminal adapter (MTA)
5)
MLC can be installed in the slots for ASL boards. It provides 8-channel 2B1Q
interface, 1-channel E1 interface, and can be connected with MTA.
MLC can
be synchronized with external E1 clock, it is mainly used in PSTN and DDN
where clock is asynchronous.
Subrate concentrating switch (SCS) board
DDU2 board is usually used, providing co-directional 64K bit/s interfaces.
MTA is a data service unit (DSU) located at the user end. It is connected with the office
end equipment (e.g. DSL, MLC) through 2B1Q interface. The access distance is 4~5km
(the line'
s diameter is 0.4mm). It can provide the subscriber with 1-channel V.24/V.35
compatible interface and 2-channel V.24 interfaces. Rates at the interface include
64/128kbit/s synchronous ports and subrate (2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2k bit/s) sync/async ports.
The subrate multiplexing conforms to regulations in ITU-T Recommendation X.50.
6)
SCS implements subrate cross of services from SRX, MTA and DDN in compliance with
ITU-T Recommendation X.50. with 2.4k as a basic unit. The cross connection capacity is
2828 time slot. SCS does not provide subscriber interface, and has no external cable.
III. Networking principle
DAS can form networking of all data services, or integration of voice services and data
services.
As the PSTN system clock may be asynchronous with DDN system clock, the issue of
clock synchronization must be taken into consideration in networking. As DDN uses
circuit switch technology, DAS system clock must be synchronous with DDN clock
when it is connected to DDN. When DAS is connected to packet switch or FR, the
system clock is not required to be synchronous, although packet port or FR interface must
be synchronous with DAS interface.
When PSTN and DDN system clock is synchronous, slots for voice service boards and
data service board can be interchangeable. In such case, DAS is integrated part of
HONET. When PSTN and DDN system clock is asynchronous, DDN is configured in
OLT. To provide multiple subscriber interfaces by ONUs, an individual frame can be
added to accommodate DAS. When MTA is capable of meeting the access demands,
MLC can be inserted in the slot for voice service board, thus to save cost.
IV. Typical networking
The following networking diagrams take into consideration the clock conditions,
networking principles mentioned above, required service types, port quantities. The board
names and quantities in the diagrams are just taken for reference, which should be
changed depending on actual networking requirements.
1)
The clocks of PSTN and DDN are synchronized, and there is only one GV5
frame in the system.
45
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
In such configuration, GV5 frame can lock PSTN clock or DDN clock. Slots for voice
boards and data service boards are interchangeable. DAS does not function as an
independent system. This fully shows the advantages of HONET in terms of integrated
services provisioning.
PSTN
DDN
D D A A D D
T T V V T T
E E 5 5 E E
ONU1
A D R R A H
S S S S S S
L L P P L L
TA128
NT1
OLT
ONU3
ONU2
A S R R D D
S R S S D S
L X P P U L
MTA
MTA
MTA
S H R R D D
R S S S S D
X L P P L U
MTA
MTA
Figure 4-5 Typical networking 1

2)
The clocks of PSTN and DDN are synchronized, and there is multiple GV5
frames in the system.
In some applications, there are multiple GV5 frames. To save DDN resources, services of
the GV5 frames are converged in one frame, and then transmitted to DDN collectively.
Interconnection between GV5 frames are enabled by DTE E1 links. As shown in Figure,
services in GV5 module 2 and module 3 are converged in GV5 module 1 through E1
links, and then transmitted to DDN.

46
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
PSTN
DDN
V5
D D A A D D
T T V V T T
E E 5 5 E E
V5
GV5(2)
E1
GV5(1)
E1
E1
D D A A D D
T T V V T T
E E 5 5 E E
ONU1
GV5(3)
D D A A D D
T T V V T T
E E 5 5 E E
ONU2
A D R R A H
S S S S S S
L L P P L L
ONU3
A S R R D D
S R S S D S
L X P P U L
S H R R D D
R S S S S D
X L P P L U

3)
PSTN and DDN clocks are asynchronous
When PSTN clock and DDN clock is asynchronous, DAS have to provide data services
independently. In such case, PV8 or PV4 frame must be configured in OLT. PV8 or PV4
frame is not required when GV5 frame can provide data services independently. To
provide multiple subscriber interfaces by ONUs, an individual frame can be added to
accommodate DAS. When MTA is capable of meeting the access demands, MLC can be
inserted in the slot for voice service board. NM can be implemented in form of unified
NM or hierarchical NM. It can be set in the maintenance terminal software.
Maintenance
terminal
Maintenance
terminal
PSTN
DDN
BAM
E1
D D A A D D
T T V V T T
M M 5 5 M M
S H P P D S
R S V V D R
X L 8 8 U X
E1
E1
A A R R A M
S S S S S L
L L P P L C
A H R R A M
S S S S S L
L L P P L C
S H R R D D
R S S S D S
X L P P U L
Data office
Telecom office

47
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
V. Packet service networking
To provide packet services, the board in OLT side which is connected to packet switch
must be of the same type as that in ONU side, or in different type but with same
functions. System clock synchronization is not required for packet services, only if the
packet port locks HONET port clock.
PSTN
PSPDN
V.24/V.35
subrate/ 64K
OLT
D D A A D D
T T V V T T
M M 5 5 M M
A D R R A S
S S S S S R
L L P P L X
TA128
S H R R D D
R S S S D S
X L P P U L
A H R R A D
S S S S S S
L L P P L L
NT1
MTA
A D R R D A
S D S S S S
L U P P L L
MTA
MTA
MTA
VI. Flexible Networking
Data services in private network are interconnected. DAS does not function
independently in such application, and can be configured with interfaces depending on
actual demands. In privacy network, auto-routing is enabled in the system, and the
network trunk resources are distributed in a unified way to ensure optimal usage of
bandwidth. In case of breakdown in somewhere, routing switch is made automatically.
PSTN
A A P P H S
S S V V S R
L L 8 8 L X
A D P P A H
S S V V S S
L L 8 8 L L
A A P P S H
S S V V R S
L L 8 8 X L

48
A A P P H D
S S V V S S
L L 8 8 L L
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
4.6 Internet Services

Figure 4-10 shows the networking of traditional Internet services.
Multip lexing
Internet
Access server
LAN
Switching network
Router
LAN
ISP
Access network
Router
Router
Router
PC
LAN
Figure 4-10 Networking of traditional Internet services
I. Characteristics of traditional Internet services networking

1)
2)
3)
It supports the extension of switching network through V5 interface. Subscribers

get access to Internet by means of dial-up or private line.
It supports circuit cross of 64kbit/s at the user access port.
The conversion between the circuit and the packet is accomplished either at the
high layer network or at the terminal.
II. Main problems in the traditional internet access solution

1)
2)
3)
V5 protocol regulates the separation of service and equipment. Call processing

is made in the switch side. With its large volume of traffic, Internet services will
affect provisioning of normal PSTN services. Network resources are wasted
especially when the called party and the caller are in the same network, or two
different access network which are connected by cascade.
Internet is a typical kind of burst service. The average rate of access service is
below 10k bit/s. But the traditional AN does not is not embedded with the
statistical multiplexing function and only provides 64k bit/s circuit at the
subscriber interface, resulting in lower utilization of the bandwidth. This is the
difference between packet network and circuit network in nature.
As IP routing is unavailable in the traditional AN, subscribers have to make
complex configurations on the router. This affects the development of IP
services in a sense.
To solve the above problems, the HONET system puts forward the solution of "IP
Inside", which consists of IP access and IP bypass.

49
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
4.6.1 IP Access and LAN Interconnection

I. Summary
HONET solves the problem of Internet access and LAN interconnection. It provides 10M
Ethernet interface, as well as WAN interfaces with adjustable bandwidth (N64kbit/s, N
in range of 1~31).
Internet
LAN
PSTN/DDN/FR
HONET
LAN
LAN
PC
Figure 4-11 IP access and LAN interconnection
II. Technological characteristics of the IP service

1)
2)
3)
4)
It uses the key technologies of Huawei Quidway Router and A8010.

It can be inserted in the slot for subscriber board, and provides 10M Ethernet
interface.
WAN interface is provided by E1 or HW of the subscriber backplane, through
which the WAN interface can be connected with other WAN interfaces on
Honet, or connected with routers through MTA, HSL or DDU. Channel bundling
is supported in the WAN interface to provide bandwidth of N64kbit/s (N in
range of 1~31).
It supports the following network protocols.
PPP (Point to Point Protocol), MP (Multilink Protocol)
Ethernet protocol
Routing protocol: RIP and RIP II
NM protocol: SNMP, Telnet remote maintenance, CLI maintenance
Firewall: packet filtering
4.6.2 IP Bypass
I. Summary
With the increasingly development of IP application, the number of Internet users is

increasing quickly. The traditional telecom network is facing with the unprecedented
impact. The problem that how to separate IP services from the present telecom network
50
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
gets close attention from the telecom manufacturers and operators all over the world.
Data bypass technology is one of the solutions.
HONET puts forward a solution to the increasingly developing Internet applications. This
solution enables smooth data bypass, in that it requires no change to the functions of the
switch and access network currently available. In the solution, Internet access unit (IAU)
is located in the HONET. The switch implements bypass of the subscriber access to IAU,
thus the switch resources can be released. Services such as dial-up, VoIP, VPN/VPDN
and callback are supported.
If IAU is located in the access network side, and is connected with OLT, Figure 4-12
illustrates the occupation of the trunk resources when calls to the IAU are not by passed.
LE
AN
V5 interface
PSTN/ISDN
IAU
Figure 4-12 Occupation of the resources when IAN is not bypassed at the AN
During the online period, the TS in the V5 interface and resources of the switch are
occupied all along. Similarly, as shown in Figure 4-13, when IAU is located in the LE
side, the same problem exists.
LE
AN
V5 interface
PSTN/ISDN
IAU
Figure 4-13 Occupation of the resources when IAU is located in the LE side
With IP bypass function, calls are processed inside the AN, not occupying V5 resources
between LE and AN, as shown in Figure 4-14.
LE
AN
V5 interface
PSTN/ISDN
IAU
Figure 4-14 Resources occupation when IP bypass of the AN is conducted

51
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
II. IP bypass solution in the HONET
This solution is expanded on the basis of the standard V5 protocol. When IP bypass is
required, LE will originate the bypass command and the connection is made inside the
AN. After the calls are completed, the connection will be cleared. Therefore, the call
processing and accounting are still made in the LE.
Take the interconnection of HONET and Huawei C&C08 exchange as an example. The
PSTN/ISDN subscriber in the AN originates a call, and LE analyzes the called number. If
the called party is the Internet AN server in the AN and IP data bypass has been enabled,
LE will send internal bypass commands to AN after the call is successfully connected.
Call bypass is made inside the AN.
HONET provides a flexible solution to the problem of Internet access. See Figure 4-15.
ONU
OLT
LE
Access equipment
PSTN/
ISDN
subscriber
Internet
Figure 4-15 IP bypass solution provided by HONET
As shown in Figure 4-15, IAU is directly connected with OLT. Thus, IAU can be
installed in the same location as OLT. The PSTN and ISDN subscribers get access to
IAU through ONU.
HONET supports module cascade. It can be accessed through OLT when the Internet
access unit is far away.
Module cascade
LE
V5
PSTN
ISDN
subscriber
OLT
OLT
ONU
Access equipment
ONU
Internet
Figure 4-16 IP bypass in case of HONET module cascade
As shown in Figure 4-16, IAU is connected with one of the OLT. It can be located
flexibly in terms of physical locations. OLT communicates with each other in way of
module cascade.
III. Typical application
The IP bypass function of the HONET system is based on the V5 protocol. It doesn'
t
affect the operating mode of the present LE and AN, and can effectively reduce the
impact of the IP applications in AN on the traditional telecom network. In service
implementation, it supports the bypass of PSTN, ISDN 2B+D and ISDN 30B+D
52
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
subscribers. IAU functions as a 30B+D user, whose physical location and access capacity
can be configured flexibly.
In coordination with Huawei A8010 access server, HONET IP bypass function can share
the switch load effectively.

TA128
PC
Modem
PC
2B+D
Switch
V5
OLT
(CC08)
ONU
PSTN
--
RADIUS Server
PSTN
Access server
(A8010)
Modem
PC
--
Internet
Router
Figure 4-17 Typical networking of HONET IP bypass
4.7 Z Interface Extension

CDI interface in the CDI board can be connected with switch to enable the transparent
extension of analog subscriber interface (Z interface). See Figure 4-18. The slot for CDI
can is interchangeable with that for ASL and DSL. Each CDI has 16 CDI interfaces.
twisted-pair
LE
OLT
ONU
POTS
Figure 4-18 Z interface extension
Functions of CDI board are as follows: detect ringing, control loopback close, detect
polarity, detect feed, call dial-up (dual-tone, pulse), occupy TS dynamically, detect signal
tone, call forwarding by hooking. Among these functions, the most important functions
are detecting ringing and control loopback close.
4.7.1 2/4-line VF Private Line Interface
As shown in Figure 4-19, the HONET system provides subscribers with 2/4-wire VF
private line interfaces.

53
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
LE
( C&C08)
ONU
V5.2
OLT
2/4-wire VF leased line
ONU
Subs- VFB
criber
frame
VFB
Figure 4-19 2/4-line VF private line interface
2/4-line VF private line is implemented by semi-permanent connection between

interfaces in CB02VFB or the last 8-channel interfaces in CB03VFB.
VFB has no feed. Its impedance can be either 600 or 1650. Its interface level and 2/4line working mode can be set by software.
When it is not certain whether the subscriber terminal equipment needs feeding, it is
recommended to use ASL analog private line. Only when the terminal equipment does
not need feeding, and the interface impedance is 600, can the VF private line be used.
The features of 2/4-line VF private line interface board are as follows:
The selection of 2/4-line interface can be made by software. The 4 lines are
made possible by combing adjacent two lines.
The impedance of 2 and 4 wire is 600 or 1650.
The receiving / transmitting gains are adjustable, the gain adjustment scope is
as follows:
For two-line:Receiving gains: -7~-2dB

Transmitting gains: -5~0dB
For four-line:Receiving gains: -11dB~+4dB
Transmitting gains: -1db~+14dB.

The coding/decoding implements the digital/analog conversion.

Over-current and over-voltage protection functions.
4.7.2 2/4 Line E&M Interface
The E & M trunk interface was originally developed American Bell Company and was
widely used all over the world. As shown in Figure 4-20, it includes two signaling
channels. One is M line (originated from transmit or Mouth) used to send signaling, the
other is E line (originated from receive or ear) used to receive signaling. That is, it is a
kind of signaling mode, which accomplishes the signaling conversion between the
exchange and transmission equipment through the signaling channel that is separated
from voice.
There are multiple types of E&M signals. In terms of the line amount, there are 2-line
E&M signal and 4-line E&M signal. 2 line E&M interface transmits and receives
signaling over one single pair of balanced line. 4 line E&M interface transmits and
receives signaling over one pair of balanced line respectively.

54
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
a1
b1
600
600
a2
600
b2
600
K1
-48V
Protection
E
-48V
Current limitation
and checking
Current limitation
and checking
K2
Protection
Interface equipment
Switch
Figure 4-20 Bell V type E&M interface
The E&M signaling process is rather simple. The line signals are occupied and
acknowledgment signals. It includes occupied conformation signals sometimes, as shown
in Figure 4-21.
Current available
T1
Calling party
M line
Calling party
E line
On conversation
Occupied
T2
T3
T4
Called party
E line
Current unavailable
Current available
Current unavailable
Called party
M line
Figure 4-21 E&M signaling
M line: When it'

s idle, the switch is off and the line current is zero. When it'
s busy, the
switch is on and the current runs along the line. The current is related to the E line current
of the exchange on the opposite end. Normally it ranges from 5mA to 50mA.
E line: when it is idle, the interface voltage is almost 48V.Its current is related to the
leakage current of M line in the switch which is connected to the interface. When the E
line is occupied, the interface voltage is nearly zero. Its current is related to the
impedance of M line in the switch.
I. E&M signaling process

1)
2)
When the exchange subscriber dials EM trunk outgoing telephone, switch k1 is

off and the current runs along M line. After the interface equipment current
detection circuit detects the current (normally ranges 6mA~25mA), it is
considered to be occupied.
After having occupied the interface equipment, the exchange transmits the
telephone number (in MFC or DTMF mode) from a1 b1 line.
55
Technical Manual
3)
4)
5)
Table of Contents
If the telephone number has been correctly transmitted, the opposite end
exchange returns the acknowledgment signal to the interface equipment, then
the interface equipment will close switch K2. The E line of the exchange will
detect the current and think that the call control has been successfully set up.
Then it enters into conversation status.
As can be seen in Figure 4-19 , the exchange and connecting equipment are
symmetrical. Incoming call is similar to the above process: switch k2 of the
connecting equipment is closed so as to use the exchange. The exchange
receives the telephone number from a2b2 line (in MFC or DTMF mode). The k1
switch of the exchange is closed so as to acknowledge the connecting
equipment. Then, it enters into conversation status.
After the conversation is over, the side who hangs up turns off the switch K. The
other side can not detect the current and will think that it receives the
disconnection signal, then, it performs disconnection operation.
II. The main indexes of ATI board
2/4-line E&M interface in HONET is located in the ATI board. Its slot is interchangeable
with that of the subscriber board. It transmits signaling and voice circuits transparently.
ATI boards transmit line signaling over voice channels using the private protocol.
Each ATI board had six channels. Each channel supports the 2/4-line VF 1 E1M mode
(Bell type v). The main technical indexes are as follows:
The impedance of the port: 600

Encoding: A law, conforms to ITU-T Recommendation G.711
Audio indexes: conforms to ITU-T Recommendation G.712
Adjustment of receiving/transmitting gains: receiving, -20
transmitting, -7 ~ +14dB and 0.5 dB per step
E&M signaling
+1.5dB,
E or M line current: 6mA ~ 40mA

ATI end-to-end transfer delay: < 10ms
ATI is mostly used for emulating intra-office trunk. See Figure 4-22.
ONU
ONU
VF interface
E
M
Switch
interface
E, M line
Transmission
equipment
A
T
I
A
T
I
VF
interface
E
M
Switch
interE, M line face
Figure 4-22 The connection mode of E&M trunk interface
E, M lines may not be used, but only use the 2/4 wire audio lines of them to transmit telemechanical data.
4.8 CATV Access

HONET access network provides a cost-effective and flexible transmission solution to
CATV services. Built-in optical transmit module and optical receive module form an
56
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
independent CATV optical transmission system. CATV is subject to centralized

monitoring and network management. See Figure 4-23.
LE
(C&C08)
OLT
ONU
V5.2
TV
CATV
Figure 4-23 CATV service access

57
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 Networking and Application ........................................................................................ 59
5.1 System Networking ............................................................................................................. 59
5.1.1 Summary .................................................................................................................. 59
5.1.2 SDH Optical Transmission System .......................................................................... 59
5.1.3 PON Optical Transmission System .......................................................................... 61
5.2 Applications......................................................................................................................... 64
5.2.1 Integrated Access Network with Narrow-band/Broadband Services in City A......... 64
5.2.2 DDN Data Service AN in City B ............................................................................... 65
5.2.3 AN with Integration of Active/Passive Optical Transmission in City C ..................... 65
5.2.4 MML Network Management of Access Network in City D ....................................... 66
5.2.5 OMC SHELL Centralized Network Management in City E ...................................... 67
5.2.6 Large-capacity and Highly-integrated AN in City F .................................................. 67
5.2.7 Object-oriented NM in City G ................................................................................... 68
5.2.8 Q3 NM Access in City H........................................................................................... 69
5.2.9 Local Network with 600 thousand lines in City I....................................................... 70
5.2.10 Local Network with 500 Thousand Lines in City J ................................................. 71

58
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 Networking and Application
HONET system can form flexible networking by making use of different transmission
means and equipment. HONET achieves FTTx, supporting access of voice/audio/data
traffic. It can function as the service access equipment in the public network or various
dedicated networks.
5.1 System Networking

5.1.1 Summary
HONET system uses the SDH optical transmission system as backbone transmission
network. In addition, it uses multiple means of auxiliary transmission means, such as
passive optical network (PON), wireless local loopback (WLL) and high-speed digital
subscriber line (HDSL).
In the following section, the transmission principles and networking of different
transmission systems are described.
5.1.2 SDH Optical Transmission System
SDH optical transmission system features flexible networking topology, standard

interface, effective self-healing capacity and overall NM. Built-in SDH AN is the
development trend of AN technology.
The built-in SDH optical transmission equipment used in HONET is SDH optical
transmission equipment at STM1 or STM-4 level designed by Huawei Technologies
independently. Its core products include:
OptiX155/622H
OptiX155/622B
OptiX155C
Chain topology and ring topology are the two basic structure of SDH network. Based on
the two basic topologies, a number of complex network topologies are created in actual
networking. Optix155C can only form simple ring topology and chain topology due to its
limited optical interfaces. Optix155/622H and Optix155/622B can be used in complex
networking topologies with their cross connection capacity, various kinds of interface and
advanced software.
I. Chain network and its expanded pivot network
Figure 5-1 shows a pivot network with multiple links converged in one point. For point
A, only OptiX155/622H or OptiX155/622B can be used there. While at points B, C, D, E
and F, OptiX155/622H, or OptiX155/622B and Optix155C can be used.
Using OptiX155/622H, or Optix155/622B, up to six 155M chains can be converged at
point A. Services can be flexibly allocated among the chains.

59
Technical Manual
B
ADM
155M
D
Table of Contents
155M
ADM
155M
ADM
C
155M
ADM
155M
ADM F ADM
Figure 5-1 Chain pivot network
II. Ring network and its combination network
Figure 5-2 shows a basic ring network. Ring network with OptiX155C can form ring
network with rate of STM-1. Ring network with OptiX155/622H or Optix155/622B can
form network with rate of STM-1 or STM-4. All the transmission equipment mentioned
above can achieve two-fibber unidirectional channel protection ring and two-fibber
unidirectional multiplexing section protection ring in compliance with ITU-T
Recommendation.
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
Figure 5-2 Common ring network
Figure 5-3 shows the intersection of two rings, which can be evolved to tangency of
multiple rings. It is required to use Optix155/622H, Optix155/622B at point A.
Equipment at other points can be Optix155/622H, Optix155/622B, Optix155C.
AD M
AD M
A
AD M
AD M
AD M
AD M
AD M
Figure 5-3 Tangent ring network
Figure 5-4 shows the tangency of two rings, with structure similar to that in Figure 5-2 .
It has two tangent points, and the intra-ring services are under protection.

60
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
A
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
Ring 1
ADM
Ring 2
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
Figure 5-4 Cross ring network
III. Combination of ring network and chain network
Figure 5-5 shows the network structure with ring combined with chain. Either channel
protection mode or multiplexing section protection mode is available on the ring.
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
Figure 5-5 Network with ring combined with chain
Figure 5-6 is a complicated pivot network structure with the combination of ring and
chain. OptiX155/622H or Optix155/622B works at point A. OptiX155C, OptiX155/622H
or Optix155/622B works at other points.
ADM
155M
155M
ADM
155M
ADM
ADM
ADM
155M
ADM
ADM
Figure 5-6 Pivot network with the combination of ring and chain
5.1.3 PON Optical Transmission System
PON is one of the optical transmission system. PON16 uses SDM for multiplexing, and
combines technologies such as TDM/TDMA, passive optical splitter, ranging, fast clock
synchronization and burst optical electrical.

61
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
PON can form multiple topologies such as star, tree and bus. HONET-PON using PON16
enables integration of voice service, data service and video services. It is suitable for
implementation of fiber to the curb (FTTC) and fiber to the building (FTTB).
In application, PON16 is built in OLT or ONU to form HONET-PON access network.
OLT mentioned in this chapter refer to OLT with built-in PON16-C, ONU refer to that
with built-in PON16-R or PAT.
Each OLT in HONET-PON network can network with a certain number of OUNs in the
basic topologies of star, tree and bus. Different topologies are applicable for different
locations and application cases.

I. Networking in star topology
Figure 5-7 shows the networking in star topology. If the passive optical branch point SP
is located near OLT, such network is applicable to application where subscribers are in
scattered about. If SP is located near ONU, such network is applicable to application
where subscribers are distributed closely. The maximum transmission distance of the
ONU is related to the optical branch ratio at SP.
As there is only one level of the passive optical branch point SP, this type of networking
enables the minimum loss and offers the longest transmission distance. When the optical
branch ratio reach the maximum of 1:16, the longest transmission distance between ONU
and OLT is up to 30km. This figure is only a theoretically estimated figure, which is
related to the quality of the specific optical system. Therefore, it has to be measured on
site and optical power has to be pre-calculated.
ONU
OLT
SP
ONU
ONU
Figure 5-7 Networking in star topology
II. Networking in tree topology
Figure 5-8 Tree topology can be regarded as combination of a number of star topologies.
It is suitable for applications where subscribers distribution is complex. Compared with
star topology, tree topology has more levels of SP. To put it in detail, the ONUA is
located in the first level, ONUB and ONUC are located in the second level. Such
networking is more flexible and covers wider areas.
In such networking, the maximum transmission distance of ONU is related to the SP
level number where the ONU is located and the optical branch ratio. The more the SP
level and the optical branch, the shorter the transmission distance. Therefore, in designing
network topology, the distribution of the network elements and pre-calculation of optical
power has to be taken into consideration.

62
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
ONU
ONU
ONU
SP
OLT
SP
Figure 5-8 Networking in tree topology
III. Networking in bus topology
Figure 5-9 shows the networking in bus topology. It is suitable for applications in long
and narrow areas, such as along the high way, railway and river.
In a specific networking application, it is recommended to pre-calculate optical power of
SP based on the distribution of network elements and transmission distance to make full
use of the optical power and achieve the longest transmission.
SP
SP
SP
OLT
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
Figure 5-9 Networking is bus topology
IV. Networking in combined topologies
The above three basic network topologies can be combined in actual networking
applications. Figure 5-10 is the schematic diagram of various basic topological structures
and networking.
In the Figure, each OLT can be connected up to 16 ONUs, forming an HONET-PON
network. Each ONU can be configured arbitrarily with 1 to 16 E1s (PON16-R) or 1 to 4
E1s (PAT). In each HONET-PON network, the quantity of E1 in total can be no more
than 16. Use passive optical distribution unit, such as passive optical splitter coupling, in
branches.
As passive branches can be made arbitrarily, the passive branch points can be located
anywhere. Therefore, the integrated network topology enlarges the network coverage.

63
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
V5.2
PON network 1
LE
OLT
OLT
AN-NMS
V5.2
ONU
ONU
ONU
ADM
SDH optical ring network
ADM
ADM
PON
PON network 2
ADM
PON
PON network 4
ONU
PON
PON network 2
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
Figure 5-10 Networking with integrated topologies
5.2 Applications
5.2.1 Integrated Access Network with Narrow-band/Broadband Services in

City A
In this example, capacity of the HONET broadband AN is scaled based on the
narrowband network. It supports multiple means of services access, such as PSTN, FR,
DDN ISDN, video conference, VOD, Ethernet, ATM and Internet. It enables network
resource sharing and information sharing. The capacity scalability implements smooth
transition from narrowband network to broadband network, and saves the customer
investment. PON equipment by Huawei is used in the solution. Figure 5-11 shows the
HONET integrated access network in city A
IP core
PSTN
OLT
NMS
VOD server
ONU
Community A
ONU
Community C
Community B
ADSL
Ethernet
HFC
Figure 5-11 HONET integrated access network in city A

64
Community D
POTS ISDN DDN, etc.
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
As shown in the Figure, the services are transmitted over 155/622Mbit/s SDH, with
broadband services and narrowband services occupying different bandwidth. The
broadband services are accessed through the broadband subscriber module. The
subscribers can get access to ATM backbone network through the 10BASE-T Ethernet
interface. in this way, FTTB + LAN is implemented. Alternatively, the subscribers can
get access to the broadband backbone network over the existing twisted pairs using
ADSL technology. In this way, FTTC + ADSL is implemented.
The HONET AN in City A shows the combination of broadband access technologies and
the existing narrowband network. Provisioning of voice services, data services and video
services are enabled in one network.
5.2.2 DDN Data Service AN in City B
DDN data service AN in city B comprises of OLT, ONU-F02A and NMS. The AN
consists of one OLT and 16 ONU-F02A, which forms two optical ring networks and one
optical subscriber link. The DDN AN provides E1 leased line, V.35 synchronous rate,
9.6kbit/s and 19.2kbit/s subrate. Figure 5-12 shows the networking in City B.
CP3000
E1 DIU SRX
DIU
E1
E1
SRX
F02A
F02A
O
O
DDN
LL
9 x 2M
TT
600~ 19.2k
SRX V.24
F02A
CP3000
64K
Subscriber terminal
F02A
F02A
F02A
F02A
CP3000
E1
F02A
AN-NMS
64k
SRX
V.24
600~ 19.2
k
DIU
Subscriber terminal
Figure 5-12 DDN networking in City B
5.2.3 AN with Integration of Active/Passive Optical Transmission in City C
Backbone network in City C uses SDH622M optical transmission system, and its
auxiliary network uses Huawei PON-16 passive optical transmission system. As a subnet
of SDH, PON is subject to the management of HONET NM. Compared with
homogenous SDH transmission, such networking is more flexible and economic. Figure
5-13 shows the networking of the active/passive integrated AN in City C.

65
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
ONU512
ONU512
22
.4
14
ADM
PON
ADM
ONU512
0%
10
18.8 Km
70 %
20
%
SDH622M
Km
6.7
%
90 %
ONU512
8.2 Km
70
%
Km
13
.2
30 %
Km
70 %
ADM
ONU512
T
ADM
30
6.8
Km
ONU512
ONU512
ONU128
ONU128
ONU512
ONU512
AN-NMS
ONU512
ONU512
Figure 5-13 Networking of the active/passive integrated AN in City C
5.2.4 MML Network Management of Access Network in City D
HONET AN in the local office of City D is connected to the toll telephone network
management system (NMS) by means of MML (man-machine language) interface. The
toll telephone NMS monitors the HONET AN, and saves the alarms and performance
statistics reported by HONET AN into the database. Two DDN links are used for the NM
communication.
Figure 5-14 shows the networking of NM in AN of City D.
NM maintenance
console
NMS
NM center
NM foreground console
Multi-serial port card
DTU
DTU
DDN
DTU
Access network
Maintenance
terminal
Figure 5-14 Networking of NM in AN in City D

66
DTU
Multi-serial port
card
OLT/BAM
Technical Manual
5.2.5 OMC SHELL Centralized Network Management in City E
Table of Contents
HONET OMC SHELL centralized network management system (NMS) supports the
management function at NE level. It can cover all the equipment in HONET access
network to provide easy and centralized maintenance.
OMC SHELL has navigator tree and the function of fast location of specific objects. It
supports the topological management by areas and levels. It can display the operating
status and alarms of each NE in real time, and provides centralized alarm console and
alarm box.
Figure 5-15 Networking of OMC SHELL centralized NM in City E
5.2.6 Large-capacity and Highly-integrated AN in City F
AN in City H uses 12 V series ONUF02A by Huawei. Each ONU is configured with one
PV8 main control frame and a maximum of four RSP extension subscriber frames. ONU
is connected to the OLT. In ONU, PV8 frame and RSP frame share the resources. E1
resources of an ONU can be evenly distributed among all of the subscriber frames. The
transmission equipment in the AN uses Huawei Optix155/622H. By means of transparent
transmission via the transmission equipment, the NM serial port of ONU is subject to the
unified NM of OLT. Figure 5-16 shows the networking of large-capacity and highlyintegrated AN in City H

67
Technical Manual
1024ASL/
24DSL/5*2M
800ASL/
16DSL/4*2M
52*2M
1024ASL/
1472ASL/
24DSL/5*2M 32DSL/6*2M
1216ASL/
32DSL/5*2M
S
S
D
D
H
H
V5.2
Table of Contents
ADM
ADM
ADM
BB
AA
M
M
ADM
ADM
ADM
1984ASL/
40DSL/9*2M
704 ASL/16DSL/ 1280 ASL
800 ASL/
3*2M
/32DSL/6*2M 16DSL/4*2M
Note: there are 11456 analog subscribers in total, and 256 digital subscribers.
Figure 5-16 Networking of City H
5.2.7 Object-oriented NM in City G
City G consists of four districts, i.e. A~D districts. AN in each district has a number of
modules, which are connected to one BAM respectively through FCP/MCP, multi-port
serial port or module cascade. Therefore, there are altogether four BAM in city G. It is
required that NM center of the municipal office manage all of the AN equipment in the
city, and maintenance department of each district have the authority to manage its own
equipment. In addition, the 97 database and 112 test center is required. Object-orient
NMS put forward by HONET meets the requirements mentioned above. Figure 5-17
shows the networking diagram.
In each district, BAM, Client and routers are connected via HUB to form a LAN. So is
the NM center and test center. Client in each district can only maintain the AN equipment
in its district, while Client of the NM center can manage all of the AN equipment in the
city.
BAM
BAM
BAM
UIClient
Router
Router
BAM
UIClient
Router
Local
Local
maintenance maintenance
Local
maintenance
97
daatbase
112 test
center
Router
UIClient
UIClient
Local
maintenance
DDN
Router
NM center
Router
Router
NCP
UIServer
UIClient1
...
Figure 5-17 Networking of object-orient NM in city G

68
UIClientm
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
5.2.8 Q3 NM Access in City H
Q3 Agent acts as the agent for multiple access modes of HONET. With the standard Q3
interface, it can be under the unified management of TMN.
In the following example, the Q3 NM in City H provides a Q3 interface for multiple
equipment i.e. one Q3-Agent system is connected to multiple BAMs simultaneously.
Agent system and BAM run on different computers, which are connected through the
data communication network (DCN). See Figure 5-18.
HONET Q3 Agent
DCN
BAM1
BAM2
BAM3
BAM4
BAM5
Figure 5-18 Networking of Q3 NM in City H
NMS based on Q3 interface consists of Manager and Agent. Manager and Agent are
developed based on the same standard. Agent made by different manufacturers but with
the same Q3 interface specification can be connected to the same Manager.
HONET Q3 Agent complies with TMN model and ITI-T recommendation. Manager
sends CMIP request to the Agent using Q3 protocol stack, to maintain the equipment.
The telecom office in City H uses access products by Huawei Technologies and other
manufacturers as well. The minimum configuration of one Q3 interface-based NMS
includes one Manager and multiple Agents. Each manufacturer has its own Agent. In
addition, it has some necessary computers and connecting equipment. The networking
configuration is shown in Figure 5-19.
HONET Q3 Agent
Manager
Huawei AN
equipment
DCN
Q3 Agent of
other Vendors
AN equipment of
other Vendors
Figure 5-19 Networking of Q3 NM in City H
The dotted line in the figure indicates the equipment communicates with Agent and the
solid line indicates Agent communicates with Manager.

69
Technical Manual
5.2.9 Local Network with 600 thousand lines in City I
Table of Contents
In the following example, HONET constructs a local network with capacity of 600
thousand lines in city I, which covers 6 counties and 1 city. The whole network is
constructed with optical fibers and integrates SDH and PON. By means of the flexible
networking of optical fibers, it implements fiber to the user (FTTU) and fiber to the curb
(FTTC). Such networking solution complies with the principle of "larger capacity and
less offices". It optimizes the network architecture significantly.
PSPDN
NT1+TA
ONU Video conference1

2B+D
OLT
DTE/DCE ONU HONET

ONU
ONU
I
UN
C&C08
RSM II
ADM
.2
V5 RSM IIE1
RSM II
OptiX 622M/155M
RSM II
OLT
ONU
CATV
RSA
NT1
ONU
ONU
D3
B+
RSM
E1
2B+D
T
NE
O
H
ONU
2B
+D
2B+DNT1
HDSL E1
ATM
ST
M1
HDSL
ISU
P/T
U
RSA E1
DDN
Internet
PH
I
PSTN
ISDN
NT1
RSA
RSA
30 B+D
Video conference2
Router
LAN
RSM:remote switching module

RSA: remote subscriber access module
NT1 ISDN: network terminal
DTE: digital terminal equipment
HDSL: high-speed digital subscriber line

OptiX: an optcial transmission equipment made by Huawei
TA ISDN: terminal adapter
Figure 5-20 Networking of the local network in City I

70
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
5.2.10 Local Network with 500 Thousand Lines in City J

ONU ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
OLT
Maninstance terminal
Maninstance
terminal
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
OLT
ONU
ONU
ONU
LE
Mainstance
center
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
LE
OLT
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
WH
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
OLT
JT
ONU
ONU
Maninstance
terminal
LE
ONU
ONU
JT
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
OLT
HG NM center
LE
WH
ONU
Maninstance
terminal
LAN
ONU
ONU
KJY
NMS Maninstance
terminal
NCP
Mainstance
center
ONU
ONU
LE
BA
ONU
ONU
OLT
LG
LE
LE
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
OLT
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
Maninstance terminal
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
ONU
Figure 5-21 Networking of the local network in City J
The application of HONET access network in the local telephone network of City J has
reached 500K lines. The whole network is constructed with optical fibers and integrates
SDH and PON networking modes to realize the basic objectives of FTTB, FTTC and
FTTV. It provides the integrated and high-quality services of voice, data, ISDN and IP,
and has yielded satisfactory social and economic benefits. In addition, it helps to establish
centralized maintenance system, realizing integrative centralized Network Management
with the whole network.

71
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 Network Management................................................................................................... 73
6.1 Summary............................................................................................................................. 73
6.2 System Structure ................................................................................................................ 73
6.3 Local End Maintenance Mode ............................................................................................ 75
6.4 Remote Maintenance Mode................................................................................................ 78
6.5 Functions and Implementation of NMS............................................................................... 81
6.5.1 Functions .................................................................................................................. 81
6.5.2 Implementation Modes ............................................................................................. 94
6.6 DAS Network Management .............................................................................................. 100
6.6.1 System Description ................................................................................................ 100
6.6.2 Separation of Maintenance Authority ..................................................................... 100
6.6.3 DAS Network Management Functions ................................................................... 100
6.7 External Interfaces ............................................................................................................ 101
6.7.1 Centralized Line Test Interface .............................................................................. 101
6.7.2 MML Interface ........................................................................................................ 109
6.7.3 Q3 Interface............................................................................................................ 110

72
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 Network Management

6.1 Summary
HONET NMS is based on TCP/IP protocol. It is of the Client/Server architecture.

HONET NMS implements the functions of the configuration, maintenance, test, alarm
generation, statistics collection, wireless AN management, transmission management,
environment & power monitoring, CATV monitoring. It supports multi-point
maintenance, local and remote maintenance. Figure 6-1 shows the software architecture
of HONET NMS.
Maintenance
terminal
BAM
Transparent transmission
SIPP main control
ESC
CATV
Figure 6-1 Architecture of HONET NMS software
HONET NMS has the following features.
Complete functions, friendly interface and easy operation.

Powerful peripheral equipment, safe and flexible configuration.
Unified management with various equipment.
Distributed management with different modules.
It can be connected to the local NM center through standard Q3 interface.
it has standard interface for 112 test.
The objects under HONET NM management fall into the following five categories.
SIPP equipment
Transmission equipment (SDH/PON)
Wireless equipment (ETS450/ETS1900)
CATV equipment
Environment and power equipment
6.2 System Structure
HONET NMS implements various management according to the actual applications and
management requirements. It also enables transition to TMN. Figure 6-2 shows the
HONET NMS architecture.

73
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
NM layer
Environment
monitoring
center
112 managment
center
AN Q3 NM
112 Q 3
NM of local
network
Centralized
maintenance system
MML
NE management layer
Local
maintenance
BAM
NE layer
Module 1
Module n
Figure 6-2 Architecture of HONET NMS
BAM is connected into multiple HONET modules or SDH transmission equipment

through the serial port, MCP card or Ethernet interface. It provides interfaces for the NM
or monitoring system at upper level. The centralized line test system can handle and test
subscribers in the access network in a centralized manner. The environment-monitoring
center can monitor the environment and power in the access network in a unified manner,
and the local NM center can manage the access network in a unified way.
HONET system itself also provides a centralized maintenance management system and a
local maintenance management system. The centralized maintenance management
system is generally located in the NM center. It supports the maintenance and
management of multiple access networks. It can be connected to a number of BAM
modules using TCP/IP protocols, maintain and manage modules which are connected to
the BAM. Local maintenance management center is generally located in the office end. It
can be connected to one BAM, and manage the modules which are connected to the
BAM.

74
Technical Manual
6.3 Local End Maintenance Mode
Table of Contents
All NM information of HONET integrated service access network are transmitted to

BAM. BAM provides various NM interfaces for various equipment, including SIPP main
control equipment, optical transmission equipment, CATV and power supply system etc.
The maintenance terminals are connected to the BAM over LAN.
I. Maintenance of SIPP Main Control Equipment

1)
Maintenance through serial port
SIPP can be connected to the BAM through serial port. There are two cases. The first one
is BAM connects with two main control boards through two serial ports over two
mutually backup links. The second one is BAM connects with any one of the two main
control boards through one serial port over one link.
Generally, the communication links are set up through direct connection. When the
connection is set up through Modem dial-up (or semi-permanent connection) or DDN
dedicated line, the transmission distance can be maximized, as shown in Figure 6-3:
ONU
DCN
BAM
2
ONU
OLT
ONU
1: network card
2: multi-serial port card
Figure 6-3 Local end maintenance through serial port

2)
Maintenance through MCP card
By means of maintenance of SIPP through MCP card, FCP communicates with SIPP
using time slot in E1. Install MCP card in BAM, and each SIPP module uses one HDLC
link or two mutually backup HDLC links. BAM can be either located in the LE side or
AN side. If BAM is located in the LE side, LE needs to support semi-permanent
connection through V5 interface. See Figure 6-4.

75
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
ONU
E1
SDH
E1
LE
E1
OLT
E1
ONU
SDH
E1
SDH
BAM
E1
ONU
Maintenance
terminal
1: Network card
2: MCP card
Figure 6-4 Local end maintenance through MCP card

3)
Maintenance through Ethernet interface
If Huawei SDH equipment is used in HONET system, BAM can maintain SIPP through
Ethernet interface. BAM connects with SDH through Ethernet interface, and SDH
connects with SIPP through serial port. BAM maintains SIPP by means of transparent
transmission of SDH. See Figure 6-5:
RS232
BAM
TCP/IP
ONU
SDH
SDH
SDH
HUB
RS232 ONU
SDH
Maintenance
terminal
RS232
ONU
Figure 6-5 Local end maintenance through Ethernet interface
II. Maintenance of wireless equipment
NM manages the wireless equipment through transparent transmission channels in SIPP.

Therefore, its maintenance is similar to that of SIPP. It can be maintained through serial
port, MCP card or Ethernet interface.
III. Maintenance of optical transmission equipment

1)
Managing SDH PON equipment
BAM communicates with SDH/PON gateway using TCP/IP protocol through the
network interface. Thus the centralized alarm management of SDH/PON can be realized.
SDH/PON service console communicates with SDH/PON NM using TCP/IP protocol
through Ethernet interface to realize the complete management of SDH/PON equipment,
as shown in Figure 6-6.

76
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
SDH/PON
service console
BAM
TCP/IP
SDH GW
SDH
Figure 6-6 NM and SDH access

2)
Managing APDH equipment
The interface between BAM and APDH transmission equipment is serial port.
IV. Monitoring of Environmental variances and intelligent equipment
BAM communicates with ESC board through transparent transmission of SIPP, so as to

monitor the environmental variances, the intelligent equipment, and power supply inside
the cabinet. ESC collects environment variances and power supply. It provides serial
ports to connect with the intelligent equipment. Figure 6-7 shows the diagram of the
interfaces.
Environment
Monitoring terminal
BAM
Transparent
transmission channel
OLT
ONU
ESC
ONU
ESC
ONU
Serial port
Serial port
Env. variance
Intelligence
equipment
Envi. variance
Intelligence
equipment
Figure 6-7 Interface between the NM and the environment monitoring equipment
V. Maintenance of CATV
1)
Maintain CATV through ESC board
NM can monitor the CATV module through SIPP transparently transmitting the
communication commands between NM and ESC. The system components are as shown
in Figure 6-8.

77
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Mainstenance
terminal
BAM
Transparent transmission
channel
SIPP main
control mldule
ESC board
Serial port
CATV module
Figure 6-8 Monitoring of CATV module through ESC board
As shown in the above figure, SIPP transmits transparently the operation commands from
NM to ESC board. ESC executes the commands in CATV, and feeds back the operation
result or board status to NM through SIPP. In addition, ESC reports the alarms and board
status changes to NM.
2)
Maintain CATV through serial port
NM is connected to CATV management module through serial port, to monitor CATV

status. The system components are as shown in Figure 6-9.
BAM
Serial port
Power
Optical
receiver
Optical
CATV
transmitter management module
Figure 6-9 Monitoring of CATV module through the serial port
NM sends commands to the CATV management module, which maintains the CATV
module, and returns the feedback to the NM through serial port. In addition, CATV
reports the alarms and board status changes to NM.
6.4 Remote Maintenance Mode
HONET NMS is based on an open and standard environment. It supports ITU-T

Recommendation 802.3, Ethernet II, V.24 protocols. In addition to the local maintenance
and management functions, it supports multiple modes of remote maintenance and
management. See Figure 6-10.

78
Technical Manual
Network
management server
Table of Contents
Other network
management system
Centralized
maintenance system
Network management layer
WAN Adaptor
WAN Adaptor
Network element management layer
DCN
Local maintenance terminal
Local maintenance terminal
WAN Adaptor
WAN Adaptor
BAM
Module 1
BAM
...
Module n
Module 1
...
Module n
Network element layer
Figure 6-10 Remote maintenance of AN-NMS
Remote maintenance of HONET NMS can be made through router, serial port connection
or dial-up network. The three maintenance modes are applicable to different occasions,
including PSTN, PSPDN, DDN, IDSN.
I. Networking via router
Routers in the end office of AN connect with those in NM center over DDN or IDSN.
They form a WAN, as shown in Figure 6-11. Interface protocol which router uses in
connecting to the WAN depends on the physical protocols in DDN. Its speed can reach as
high as 64kbit/s. The disadvantage is that it must be used in DDN or PSPDN, so its cost
is high.
NM server
Centralized maintenance
terminal
NM center
LAN
Router
V.24/V.35
Local maintenance
terminal
Local maintenance
terminal
DDN / ISDN
V.24/V.35
Router
Router
LAN
LAN
BAM
BAM
Module1 ... Module n
Module1 ... Module n
Figure 6-11 Networking with DDN/ISDN
II. Networking via router and E1 line of PSTN
In each AN end office and NM center, equipment with E1 interface, such as DCM,
provides digital channels with the rate of N64kbit/s. The equipment and the routers form
a WAN, as shown in Figure 6-12. The equipment can abstract a number of time slots in
79
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
PCM for transmitting data information of the managed office. Due to wide coverage of
PSTN and its low cost, this networking is ideal way for forming WAN.
terminal
NM server
NM center
LAN
Router
V.24/V.35
V.24/V.35
DCM
DCM
E1
E1
PSTN
E1
Local maintenance
terminal
E1
DCM
Local maintenance
terminal
DCM
V.24/V.35
V.24/V.35
Router
Router
LAN
LAN
BAM
Module 1
BAM
... Module n
Module 1
... Module n
Figure 6-12 Networking through E1 line
III. Networking through serial port
In such networking, each end office is connected to DDN through serial port, as shown in
Figure 6-13. A gateway server is configured in the NM center. A WAN can be formed
through the gateway server over DDN. Such networking features simple topology and
reliable communication. Its advantage is it must be within a DDN coverage.
Performance
statistics
Transmission
management
Environment
monitoring
Data
management
Maintenance
Performance
statistics
Wireless
management
Test
Alarm
Transmission
management
Environment
monitoring
Data
management
Wireless
management
Maintenance
Test
Alarm
WS
WS
WAN/LAN
SDH
BAM
Figure 6-13 Networking through serial port
IV. Dial-up network
Dial-up network is based on Windows95/Window98/WindowsNT. It can be implemented

in PSTN, PSPDN and ISDN. Compared with the networking via router, such networking
scheme has lower cost. Figure 6-14 shows the networking topology.

80
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
terminal
NM server
NM center
LAN
Remote access
server
Modem
Modem
PSTN
Local maintenance
terminal
Modem
Local maintenance
terminal
Modem
LAN
LAN
BAM
BAM
Module 1 ... Module n
Module 1 ...
Module n
Figure 6-14 Networking through the dial-up network
In NM center, maintenance, data management and test of the AN offices are performed in
the maintenance terminal.
As a part of the local network, HONET AN can be integrated into the NMS. The RAS
(remote access server) receives the numbers dialed from each site and connects them into
a WAN. It may be a hardware device, or a PC running Windows OS.
6.5 Functions and Implementation of NMS

6.5.1 Functions
Main functions of HONET network management system include: data configuration,

system maintenance, system test, alarm, performance statistic, environment and power
monitoring, wireless AN management, transmission equipment management etc.
I. Data configuration
Data configuration management is responsible for managing the configuration

information of various types of equipment and services. It allows the management
personnel to create, delete, query and modify the operating parameters and conditions of
the equipment and service to keep the equipment running normally. The specific
functions include:
Networking Configuration
To configure the information of all NEs in HONET system.
Equipment Configuration
To configure all the hardware data, including rack, frame, slot, master node and HW,
maintenance mode of each module, connection relationship between modules,
configuration of the test equipment, and configuration of the clock mode.
Service interface

81
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
To configure the data of V5 interface between HONET system and the upper-level LE.
To configure the data of the V5 interface cascading of inter-module interfaces, which are
unique to HONET system.
Subscriber Interface
To configure the subscriber data of different types, including basic subscribers, primary
rate subscribers, ISDN subscribers and DDN subscribers.
Semi-permanent connection
To configure the semi-permanent connection information of the system.
Alarm information
To configure different kinds of alarm parameters of HONET system, such as, whether to
send alarms, detailed explanation and recovering recommendations of various alarms.
The alarm parameters are preset and not subject to change in normal cases.
Wireless Data
To configure various configuration data when HONET system has wireless subscribers,
including wireless subscribers, base station data, type of slot boards and attribute of
wireless WSA etc.
II. System maintenance
The system maintenance provides the real-time monitoring and maintenance of the
operating status of the access network equipment (such as SIPP equipment). The major
functions are as follows:
Daily maintenance
Check the NE topological diagram and the status of each network element;
Check the configuration and working status of the NE boards;
System software and data loading, active/standby switchover and system reset;
Switchover of the order wire.
Query status of PV8 E1 protection group, clock source, clock frame and backup switch
etc.
Loading of board software and host software patch etc.
Service interface
Operations of the V5 system include: reset, close and query of the V5 interface, query of
the logic communication channels, query and reset of the backup physical
communication channels, PSTN restart and protection switchover;
Operations of 2M links include query, immediate blocking, deferred blocking, nondeferred blocking, unblocking and reset etc.
Operations of PSTN port and ISDN_BRA port include query, immediate blocking,
deferred blocking, non-deferred blocking, unblocking and reset etc.
Operations of ISDN_PRA port include query, immediate blocking, deferred blocking,
non-deferred blocking, unblocking, reset, subscriber fault, network fault and level etc.
Operations of HSL port include blocking, unblocking, far end loop-back, near end loopback and removal of loop-back;
Operations of MTA port include query, near end loop-back of channels, far end loopback of channels and reset;
Operations of TA128 port include TA query, B1 near end (2A) loop-back, B2 near end
(2A) loop-back, B1 far end (3A) loop-back, B2 far end (3A) loop-back, removal of loopback and TA reset etc.
Performance monitoring and bit error test is made for 2B1Q.


82
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Query of Ethernet interface information, CPU occupation ratio, operations with the
interface, remote test with the serial port etc.
Query, connection and disconnection are made for the semi-permanent

connection.
Real time tracing is performed for the V5 signaling, port commands and the
system performance.
III. System test
The system test is performed by HONET online test system. The test system supports
parallel and serial tests in routine and instant test modes to test the internal line, external
line, telephone set and other items. Its main functions include:
Test of external line of analog subscribers
It refers to the test of various performances and indexes (such as inter-line capacitance,
resistance etc.) of subscriber lines (external lines) to judge whether the external line is
disconnected, shorted etc., and provide reference for the maintenance of subscriber lines.
The test indexes include:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Insulation resistance to ground of A line, insulation resistance to ground of B

line, insulation resistance between AB lines and loop resistance between AB
lines.
Capacitance to ground of A line, capacitance to ground of B line and
capacitance between AB lines.
AC voltage to ground of A line, AC voltage to ground of B line and AC voltage
between AB lines.
DC voltage to ground of A line, DC voltage to ground of B line and DC voltage
between AB lines.
According to the test results and judgement standards, we can draw the following
qualitative conclusions:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
Normal: the external line is free of fault.

Touching the power line: the external line touches the power line.
Dual lines touching: both A line and B line touch other subscriber external lines.
A line touching: A line touches other subscriber external lines.
B line touching: B line touches other subscriber external lines.
A line and B line touching ground: both A line and B line touch the ground.
A line touching ground: A line touches the ground.
B line touching ground: B line touches the ground.
Self touching: A line and B line touch each other.
Poor insulation between AB lines: poor insulation between A line and B line.
Electric leakage of A line and B line to ground: electric leakage of both A line
and B line to ground.
Electric leakage of A to ground: electric leakage of A line to ground
Electric leakage of B to ground: electric leakage of B line to ground
Telephone set disconnected (line disconnected) : the external line is
disconnected with the phone set or external line of the subscriber is broken.
Not hook on: subscriber's telephone set does not kook on.
Internal line test of analog subscribers
It is used to test the functions of the subscriber circuit, such as off-hook, dialing tone,
pulse dialing, ring back tone, busy tone, feed, polarity, on-hook, ringing, ring cut-off etc.
to judge whether various functions are correct.
Telephone set test of analog subscribers
The test personnel coordinate with the subscriber through a test telephone set to test
various performance and indexes of the subscriber'
s telephone set (such as number
receiving, loop resistance etc.) to provide reference for maintenance.

83
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
The major performances to be tested include: ringing, number receiving, polarity

reversal, loop resistance, sending uncontinuous tone, sending continuous tone and
hooking receiving etc.
To provide the call emulation functions of the caller automatic call and the
called automatic answer.
External Line Test of Digital Subscribers0
It is basically the same as the external line test of analog subscribers. It tests 12
performance indexes (excluding loop resistance between A/B line).
External line test of ISDN BRA subscribers
It tests various performance indexes of subscriber terminals, including activation of NT1,

deactivation of NT1 and transmission bit error code.
Internal line test of ISDN BRA subscribers
It tests various performance indexes of subscriber boards, including activation and

deactivation of NT1, manual turn-on of line feed voltage, manual cut-off of line feed
voltage, LT power supply voltage and over-current protection of LT power supply.
Switch the ISDN BRA subscriber port over to reference NT1 or reference LT for
fault localization.
Diagnostic Test of ISDN BRA Subscribers
Diagnostic test of ISDN BRA Subscribers provides a platform, which can be used to
localize the sources of a fault, such as "unable to be activated" and "Difficult to be
activated" etc. This platform can also be used to evaluate the transmission quality of digit
segment or its sub-channel, to detect the power status of NT1 on line, or to evaluate the
supportability of NT1 equipment to the maintenance function.
Diagnostic test of the ISDN BRA subscribers provides the following functions:
activation, loop-back, deactivation/loop-back removal, 2B+D loop-back from NT1, B1
loop-back from NT1, B2 loop-back from NT1, NT1 power status, request worsen CRC,
worsen CRC notification, hold status and normal recovery.
External line test of 2/-4 audio subscribers
It is basically the same as the external line test of analog subscribers. It tests 12
performance indexes (excluding loop resistance between A/B line).
It can make a self-test of TSS board of test equipment and detect TSS test
channel.
It provides system online test.
Major items of online test includes:
Routine-test: it is a task executed automatically and regularly. HONET online

test system provides two types of routine test tasks: routine bi-directional call
test and routine bit error test.
Diagnostic system: the diagnosis is triggered when a fault is found during the
routine test or triggered through man-machine interface when the maintenance
personnel find a fault. Diagnosis is used to determine the cause of the fault and
locate it. HONET on-line test system provides service-based fault location
system, such as call service-based diagnosis of call fault and semi-permanent
service-based diagnosis of semi-permanent connection.
Enhanced maintenance tool: relative to routine test, it does not automatically
originate nor is triggered by a task regularly. The maintenance personnel start it
through man-machine interface according to the requirements. It is for the
experienced maintenance personnel.
Operation report: it provides an approach for the real-time monitoring of the
system, makes a statistic of the operating information during a certain period
and forms the final report.
It can provide the function of forced access and monitoring.
84
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
It can be connected with equipment of other manufactures to do the test (test

instruments).
IV. Alarm
Alarm management converts the faults of the equipment and the service into a certain
form of alarm events, analyzes and processes them, and then provides them to the user in
the forms of graphic, text, light and sound. Meanwhile, it provides the possible causes
and the removal measures etc.
The alarm subsystem receives, converts, stores, browses and queries the alarms. It also
drives the alarm box to generate audible and visual alarms.
The alarm management system receives, converts, stores and browses the alarms reported
by SIPP, SDH, PON, wireless, near end CATV and environment detecting equipment. It
also drives the alarm box to generate tone and visual alarms.
Alarm information
The alarm information consists of alarm ID, module number, NE number, date, time,
alarm name, serial number, alarm attribute type, alarm level, alarm sub-type, number of
the alarm box, NMS alarm sub-type number, active/standby equipment indication and
alarm parameters.
For the alarms coming from the same source, the alarm ID can be used uniquely to
identify one alarm;
The module number and the NE number are used to identify the location of the alarm
reported;
Date and time refer to the time when BAM receives the alarm;
The serial number is used to mark the sequence of alarms generated. Each alarm has only
one serial number to identify it;
According to the alarm attribute type, alarms are classified as event alarm, fault alarm
and removal alarm. A fault alarm corresponds to a removal alarm;
According to the importance, alarms are classified as four levels: critical alarm, major
alarm, minor alarm and warning;
The alarm sub-type number of the alarm box is used to determine the corresponding
alarm LED on the alarm box when an alarm is sent to the alarm box. They are classified
as control system, master node communication system, signaling system, trunk system,
clock system, network system, subscriber system, software running alarm, test system,
communication between FAM and BAM, optical path, tributary, clock, off-line,
transmission system, CATV, primary power supply, secondary power supply, batteries,
door inhibition, temperature, humidity, MDF, and smoke, temperature, humidity, burglar
alarm, and power supply of the equipment room;
NMS alarm sub-type number is classified as: communication alarm, service quality
alarm, processing error alarm, equipment alarm and environment alarm;
Active/standby equipment indication shows the alarm comes from either the active or
standby equipment;
Alarm parameters are used to represent additional alarm information.
For an alarm determined by the alarm source and alarm ID, its alarm type, alarm level,
alarm box sub-type number, NMS alarm sub-type number, and the corresponding alarm
ID are configured in the database.

Alarm storage
Alarms are stored in two forms: fault alarm file and history alarm file.
85
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
The fault alarm file stores all fault alarms. When one fault alarm is removed, it is
identified with a removal mark. When BAM restarts, it will pack all the removed alarms,
or the removed alarms can be PACKED through the alarm console. BAM packs the
removed alarms every 24 hours. The PACKED alarms will be deleted from the fault
alarm file.
The history alarm file use "day" as the unit to store all information of alarms generated in
a day, including running information. By default, it stores the alarms for 100 days. Upon
the expiry date, the oldest alarm file will be deleted when a new alarm file is generated.
Users can configure the number of history alarm files to be kept in the configuration file.
Alarm browse and alarm query
Users can browse a fault, event and history alarm file through the alarm console, or query
an alarm file by setting various query conditions.
When browsing and querying an alarm, you can view the detailed information about a
particular alarm, including alarm cause, removal proposal, detailed description and
parameter explanation.
The dynamic appending function can be provided when browsing and querying an alarm.
Real time alarm
The alarm management subsystem can monitor the alarm information in real time,
including the real time display and printout of alarm information.
Real time display means to instantly display all the legal alarms received by BAM on the
alarm console.
Real time printout means to print out the alarms instantly. Filtering conditions can be set
up for the real time printout so that only the alarms satisfying the conditions can be
printed out.
Audible and visual alarm
An alarm box can be connected to BAM or the WS to provide alarm received by BAM
with tone and visual alarm. Or a sound card and sound box can be installed in the alarm
subsystem computer to provide audible alarm. The alarm subsystem controls the alarm
box, including turning on or off the LED in the alarm box and stopping the alarm sound.
Fault and removal processing
In case a fault occurs in a device, it will report a fault alarm; when the fault is removed, a
removal alarm will be reported with a removal alarm. The removed fault alarms will turn
into gray in the browse or query window of the alarm console. The removed fault alarm
can be packed out from the fault alarm file, but the fault alarms in the history alarm file
will not be deleted.
V. Performance Statistics
The performance statistics provide all types of statistical data and reflect the running
quality of HONET system through the analysis of the data. It has the following major
functions:
CPU performance monitoring
The items to be monitored: 1) CPU occupation rate and peak value; 2) count when the
CPU occupation rate exceeds the congestion and overload threshold; 3) CPU congestion
and overload time length.
V5 interface information statistics
The specific statistical items include:

1)
2)
Count of V5 interface startup and protective switchover

Unavailable time of V5 interface;
86
Technical Manual
3)
4)
5)
6)
Number of C-channels in the non-working status;

Number of C-channels in the non-working status due to congestion;
Number of 2M links forming the V5 interface;
Number of C-channels forming the V5 interface.
Trunk 2M link information statistics
1)
2)
3)
4)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Count of link congestion at LE;

Count of link congestion at LE;
Count of link failures;
unavailable time of the link.
Physical C channel information statistics
Count of C-channel unavailable due to any reason
Count of C-channel unavailable due to 2M link congestion;

C-channel unavailable time due to 2M link congestion;
C-channel unavailable time;
Count of C-channel in active/standby mode;
Time when C-channel in active/standby status;
The current status of C-channel.
Logic C-channel information statistics
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Table of Contents
Total number of encapsulated frames received and transmitted

8-bit array information;
statistics of ISDN encapsulated frames;
number of the V5 protocols received and transmitted in the C-channel;
number of wrong V5 protocols in the C-channel.
B-channel information statistics
Count of bearer channel allocation

Connection to another port already existing in the V5 time slot;
invalid V5 time slot identifier;
V5 time slot being used as physical C channel;
V5 link unavailable (blocked);
user port not provisioned
bearer channel status.
General information about the equipment
Board availability rate
Total number of boards;
Number of faulty boards;
count of board failures.
PCM seized rate information
The specific statistical items include:1) HW seized rate (traffic).
User frame information

1)
2)
3)

Quantity of information transmitted and received by the subscriber frame

Communication interruptions of the subscriber frame;
Communication time length of the subscriber frame.
Traffic of ISDN signaling
Physical layer information

Traffic of ISDN signaling

1)
Number of 8-bit arrays received and transmitted;

87
Technical Manual
2)
3)
4)
Total errors of LG, NO, CRC, AB;

Total number of frames received and transmitted;
Average number of 8-bit arrays in each frame.
Link layer information

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
Count of transmitting and receiving SABME, UA, RR, DISC, REJ, RNR, FRMR
and I frames;
count and time of receive congestion at the local end;
count and time of receive congestion at the opposite end;
Number of un-requested monitoring response frames;
Number of un-requested DMA response frames;
C number of un-requested UA response frames;
D number of un-requested UA response frames;
Count of the link re-establishing of the same starts;
Count of unsuccessful re-transmitting of SABME;
Count of unsuccessful re-transmitting of DISC;
Count of status query failures;
Count of n (r) errors;
Count of frmr response receiving;
Count of unrealized frame receiving;
Count of un-permissible i segment receiving;
Count of the receiving of frames with error;
Count of n201 errors;
Total number of abnormal frames etc.
Information of CATV transmitting end

1)
2)
3)
4)
Table of Contents
Transmitting power level;

Bias current;
Cooling current;
Laser temperature.
Information statistics of CATV receiving end
The specific statistical items include: input optical power
VI. Environment power supply monitor board
The environment and power monitoring tests and controls the environment and power
equipment under which the access network equipment operates. It provides unified
control of the environment, power equipment and other intelligent equipment inside and
outside the cabinet and implements the remote supervision and centralized management
of the non-attendant network elements. The specific functions are as follows:
Monitoring of environment inside ONU cabinet
The environment in ONU cabinet is monitored by the environment supervision card

(ESC). It monitors the ambient temperature, humidity, status of the door inhibition and
the wire distribution frame inside the cabinet, and controls the temperature and humidity
by turning on and off the fan and air conditioner.
Temperature monitoring: to detect the temperature inside the cabinet by means of the
temperature sensor, and to control the fan and air conditioner on the basis of the detected
temperature and the preset temperature. In this way, the temperature will be controlled.
Humidity monitor: to detect the humidity inside the cabinet by means of the humidity
sensor.
-300Door inhibition: to judge whether the cabinet door is closed or not by detecting the
door control switch.

88
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Wire distribution frame: The status of the distribution frame is an on/off signal. It is
judged by detecting the status of the security unit. When the security unit is broken
through and the alarm end is grounded, the status of the distribution frame is faulty.
Control of fan and air conditioner: the fan and air conditioner can be controlled
automatically by ESC board based on the temperature and humidity and the threshold
preset at the background. They also can be turned on/off manually with the commands
sent from the background.
Monitoring of other analog and digital parameters inside the cabinet: ESC board provides
analog sensor interface and discrete sensor interface, which can be connected to analog
and digital sensors to detect the signals or monitor other environment parameters inside
the cabinet according to the requirements of the users.
Monitoring of environment outside the cabinet
Through the analog and discrete sensor interfaces provided by ESC board, one can
monitor the environment parameters outside the cabinet, such as temperature, humidity,
infrared, fire alarm, burglar alarm and water etc. ESC board also provides two control
output interfaces to control the on/off of the intelligent output equipment (e.g. air
conditioner and diesel generator).
Temperature monitoring: the system detects the temperature of the equipment room with
the external temperature sensor. It also can control status of the air conditioner in the
equipment room based on the measured temperature and through the control output port
to control the temperature.
Humidity monitoring: the system detects the humidity of the equipment room with the
external humidity sensor.
Fire and water alarm monitoring: with reference to the fire and water prevention standard,
the fire and water alarm information is detected through the smoke and water sensors,
and reported to the network management system.
Burglar alarm detection: with reference to the burglar prevention standard, the burglar
alarm is detected through the infrared sensor, door control switch and window broken
sensor, and reported to the network management system. The burglar alarm can be set or
cancelled to avoid unnecessary alarm upon the entry and exit of the staff members.
Burglar alarm detection: with reference to the burglar prevention standard, the burglar
alarm is detected through the infrared sensor, door control switch and window broken
sensor, and reported to the network management system. The burglar alarm can be set or
cancelled to avoid unnecessary alarm upon the entry and exit of the staff members.
Monitoring of the diesel generator set: this function is performed by the monitoring
subsystem of the intelligent diesel generator set. The detected results can be reported by
the external sensor of ESC board. The items to be monitored include voltage, current,
frequency, diesel level, water temperature, over-speed alarm, start failure alarm,
mains/diesel power switchover control.

Monitoring of power supply equipment
The environment and power supply monitoring card (ESC) can be used together with the
intelligent power supply equipment (such as Huawei PS48240, PS4810 and PS48100). It
monitors the power supply equipment by communicating with the monitoring module of
the intelligent power supply equipment through the serial interface.
Detection and display of the status of power supply: AC input voltage, operating status of
the power supply module, DC output voltage, DC output current, charging current of

89
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
batteries, battery fuse status, charging mode of batteries, control mode, and hierarchical
power-off.
Configuration of the operating parameters of the power equipment: To configure the
over/under-voltage alarm point of the input, the over/under-voltage alarm point of the
output, hierarchical power-off voltage of the loads, and the over-current charging point
etc. to make the operation and alarm of the power equipment correct.
Control of the power supply equipment: it mainly turns on/off the module and switches
over the equalized/float charging of batteries etc.
Other power supplies can be monitored through ESC board itself and the external
sensors, including voltage, current, primary power and equalized/float charging.
Monitoring of environment and power supply by connecting other intelligent

equipment externally through the transparent transmission serial port
A transparent transmitted channel is provided for environment monitoring to monitor the

environment and power supply by other intelligent equipment. The monitoring
information is sent to the related monitoring platform through the transparent
transmission channel.
Supervision performed through the transparent serial port allows the product to have a
strong expandability and adaptability. Power supply equipment of Huawei and other
manufactures can be included in the supervision scope according to the user'
s
requirement.
VII. Management of ETS450 wireless equipment
Wireless management system provides management of the wireless access equipment

ETS450 in HONET system. The specific functions are as follows:
Maintenance Operation (on-line and reset of base station)
Equipment Control: To perform the status monitoring, reset and query of various boards
in the channel control frame of the base station. This function can show the status of
WAS, TSL and QLC in the channel control frame in graphics. The user can reset and
query any board.
Channel Maintenance: To perform the maintenance operation of any one or several
continuous channels of the base station, including open, close, query and reset of the
channel(s).
Channel monitoring: To monitor the status of 32 channels in real time. Channel status
includes uninstalled, fault, idle, channel busy, blocked, maintenance, test and control of
channel.
Switchover of control channels: To switch the control channel immediately over to
another idle channel that can be used as the control channel.
Subscriber query: To query the status of a number of continuous wireless subscribers
according to the serial numbers of the wireless subscribers. The status includes
uninstalled, fault, blocked status, tested status, idle, signal sending status, paging status,
listening status and conversation status.
Subscriber monitoring: To monitor the status of the wireless subscribers in real time.
Channel gain control: this function is valid only for ETS450. It is used to set various
gains of a specified channel. These gains include MSK signaling transmitting gain,
prompt voice gain, DTMF transmitting gain, down link voice gain, up link voice gain,
transfer gain, MSK receiving gain and down link CTC gain etc.

90
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Channel test: this function is valid only for ETS450. It can make a full "0" test and full
"1" test of a specified MSK channel.
Performance Statistics
Performance statistics performs the traffic measurement of the base station. First, a task
register request is sent to the base station by the maintenance terminal through BAM.
When the base station has registered the task, it makes a statistic of the basic data
according to the specific test time of the task, such as the count of calls originated and the
count of successful channel allocations. After the statistic measurement in a period is
completed, the statistic data are sent to the maintenance terminal. The maintenance
terminal calculates the data that subscribers concern about by analyzing these basic data,
such as the traffic amount of the caller and the traffic amount of the called. It provides the
service providers with the information about system performance, maintenance
requirement and expansion requirement.
1)
Register of task
There are 35 types of tasks to be registered, among them, 0~31 is channel task, 32 is base
station task (BS), 33 is BSC task (BSC) and 34 is sub-net task (SN).
Basic items of channel task statistics: count of number received completely, count of the
called answers, count of the caller on-line times, count of the called on-line times, count
of the caller carrier undetected times, count of the called carrier undetected times, length
of the caller seized time, length of the caller seized time, bytes transmitted by the control
channel and bytes received by the control channel.
The basic statistic items of the base station tasks: time length of the caller seized channel,
time length of the called seized channel, count of call attempts, count of successful
channel allocations, count of number received completely, count of call appearance of the
called, paging count of the called, and count of the called answers.
The basic statistic items of the BSC task: time length of the caller seized channel, time
length of the called seized channel, count of call attempts, count of successful channel
allocations, paging count of the called and count of the called answers.
The basic statistic items of the sub-net (SN) task: count of the caller on-line times, count
of the called on-line times, count of the caller carrier undetected times, count of the called
carrier undetected times, length of the caller seized time and length of the caller seized
time.
According to these basic statistic items, the statistic results of the related items can be
calculated.
When registering a task, the legality of the task time is checked first. Then, check
whether this task has existed in the on-line task. Only when it does not exist, can it be
registered.

2)
Deletion of task
3)
Query of task
Task deletion is classified as the deletion of on-line task and the deletion of off-line task.
For the deletion of on-line task, a command is sent to the WSA host to delete the task
under statistic in the host. Meanwhile, it is necessary to delete the statistic result record of
the task that has been reported.
When deleting an off-line task, it only needs to delete the task and the statistic results
together.
It is to query the status of a task. Status of the task includes: registration in progress,
activation, stop and off-line. When the task has been registered successfully, it will
91
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
automatically switch to activation status. When the statistic time segment of the task is
completed, it will switch to off-line status.
4)
Activation and Stop of Task
5)
Check of statistic results
Activation and stop of task need to send the related commands to WAS. If a task is in
stop status, item statistic will not be made for it, and no statistic result will be reported.
An item statistic will be performed only in activation status.
Performance statistic results can be browsed according to the task types. For each type of
statistic tasks, the following items can also be checked through the calculation of basic
items, in addition to check the statistic results of the basic items.
For 32-channel task types, the items include: traffic amount of the caller, frame loss ratio
of the caller, disconnection ratio of the caller, traffic amount of the called, frame loss
ratio of the called, disconnection ratio of the called, total traffic amount, total seized time
length, total counts of used times, count of conversation disconnection times, average
usage time, max. value of the traffic amount and min. value of traffic amount.
For base station task type: failure ratio of caller channel distribution, loss of frame ratio
of the caller, failure ratio for called channel distribution, loss of frame ratio of the called,
average originating traffic amount and average receiving traffic amount.
For BSC task type: count of unsuccessful service requests, number of unsuccessful
paging information.
For sub-net task type: call loss ratio, channel occupation ratio, outgoing call traffic
amount and incoming call traffic amount.
Test Functions
Power Test of Base Station: test the status of the active and standby power supplies of the
base station.
Temperature/Humidity Test of Base Station: test the temperature and humidity of the
base station.
Test of Antenna Stand Wave Ratio: test the status of transmitting antenna and receiving
antenna of the base station.
Test of Control Channel Attribute: test the frequency and status of the control channel.
Test of Base Station Channel: test the transmitting channel, receiving channel or TSL
self-loop communication of a specified channel.
Test of Base Station Channel: test the transmitting channel, receiving channel or TSL
self-loop communication of a specified channel.
Monitoring of SU Power: monitor the power and ID code of SU. This function requires
the SU to originate a test call to coordinate.
Query of SU Subscriber Status: check the status of SU DC, SU AC and SU subscribers of
a group of wireless subscribers according to their serial numbers. The subscriber status
include idle, uninstalled, busy and locked (not on-hook for a long time).
Monitoring of SU Subscriber Status: monitor the variation of SU subscriber status in real
time. It can monitor DC status of SU, AC status of SU and SU subscriber line status.
Configuration of Alarm Parameters: set up the condition under which the base station
generates temperature/humidity alarm.

VIII. Management of ETS450 wireless equipment
Wireless management system provides management of the wireless access equipment

ETS450 in HONET system. The specific functions are as follows:

92
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Equipment maintenance
Board configuration status: Observe the board configurations in each network element
and the board working status. It provides the functions of board resetting and query.
Maintenance of DLI board: Working status and channel occupation of U interface is
shown in real time in the tracking window. Working status of the base station to which U
interface is connected is tracked, selfloop test and remote power control is also available.
The function of board status query shows the current status of the virtual interface in DLI
board, as well as its attributes.
Base station maintenance: status list of the base stations observes real-time working
status of all base stations to which the system is connected. It tracks the channel
occupation ratio. In addition, it enables reset of multi-level base stations.
Tracing and observing wireless subscribers: show the basic information of wireless
subscribers, including the terminal type, IPEI etc. It also observes the call connection.
Registration of wireless subscribers
ETS1900 subscriber terminals include SU1900, DECT PHONE, DECT mobile phone
etc. They must be registered in ETS1900 wireless management subsystem for connection
with the system.
Registration of the mobile phone is as follows: it initiates a request, and reports its IPEI
to the registration station. The registration data is generated in ETS1900 management
subsystem, and sent to the mobile phone.
For registration of fixed terminals, such as SU and DECT PHONE, ETS1900
management subsystem writes the registration data into the terminals directly through the
serial port.
IX. Transmission management
The transmission management subsystem manages and controls the OptiX active optical
transmission system and PON-16 passive optical transmission system. It provides the
functions of network planning, installation, operation and maintenance, provision,
customer service and other supports. For the definition of its management information
model, refer to ITU-T M.3100 and G.774. The specific functions are as follows:
System management
The system management refers to the management of the attributes and resources of the
transmission system itself.
Network topology management
There are four types of topology objects: network element, subnet, link and network
management.
Different types of objects have different attributes, but all of them have one identifier
attribute and a name attribute.
Users can create icons on the background map with geographic information based on the
actual network structure, which correspond to the actual subnets or network element, and
create links that corresponds to the actual lines.
Configuration management
The configuration management mainly sets up the operating parameters of the network
elements (NE), configures the boards for NE operation, sets up the operating parameters
of each board and controls the status of equipment and resources. Therefore, it can lock
and maintain the resources in service, maintain the service structures of the NE and

93
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
network and manage the cross-connecting matrix of NE service and the service paths at
each layer of the network.
Fault management
The fault management is a kind of network management function that is related to the
test, diagnosis, removal and elimination of equipment fault. It is designed to ensure the
network can provide continuous and reliable service. The main tasks of the fault
management is fault monitoring and fault locating.
Performance management
The performance management function mainly provides the report and evaluation related
to the status of the transmission equipment, and the performance of the network or
network element. It collects all kinds of statistical data for monitoring or correcting the
status and performance of the network, network elements or the equipment, and helps
with the planning and analyzing.

Report management
The report management mainly provides printing and previewing of various

configuration data (e.g. Service, tributary board, logic system, clock board, overhead and
board position), data about security, performance and alarm as an auxiliary tool to
facilitate the user'
s management.
Maintenance management
The maintenance management mainly maintains the operating status of the transmission
system to ensure its normal operation.
Security management
The security management is designed to protect the network resources and equipment
from illegal access. The transmission management subsystem and the network elements
provide their own security management and control respectively to form a powerful
security protection system.
6.5.2 Implementation Modes
I. Service-based implementation mode
HONET network management system divides maintenance terminals according to the

principle of service separation: data management subsystem, maintenance subsystem,
alarm subsystem, test subsystem, performance statistic subsystem, environment and
power monitoring subsystem, etc. The main function of each service console is to provide
subscribers with graphic man-machine interface to perform the unified maintenance and
management of HONET system jointly.
OMC 2000 and WS are two service-based management modes.
1)
WS and BAM communicate with each other via TCP/IP protocol. All individual
service consoles can operate on WS independently and make their own service
management and equipment maintenance, as shown in Figure 6-15.

94
Technical Manual
Performance
statistics
Transmission
management
Environment
monitoring
Data
management
Maintenance
Table of Contents
Performance
statistics
Wireless
management
Test
Alarm
Transmission
management
Environment
monitoring
Data
management
Maintenance
Wireless
management
Test
Alarm
WS
WS
WAN/LAN
SDH
BAM
Figure 6-15 Service-based management -- WS networking mode
A WS can only be connected to one BAM at a time while a BAM can be connected with
multiple WSs simultaneously. Functions of each service console are as follows:
2)
Data management subsystem: it provides all data management functions. All

configured data are saved in the database of the back administration module.
Users make various access operations of the database and perform various
data management through the operation data list.
Maintenance subsystem: it provides real-time supervision and maintenance of
the access network equipment such as SIPP in graphic mode.
Alarm subsystem: it performs the query and management of equipment alarm
and management of equipment alarm in graphic mode.
Test subsystem: it performs the test of equipment performance together with
various test equipment and host software in test task mode.
Performance statistic subsystem: it performs the statistics and observation of
V5 interface information, operation of access equipment and communication
service quality. It has the graphic statistic analysis function and can display the
variation trend of statistic data in real time and directly. It can also provide day
and month report and can summarize statistic data of a day and a month.
Environment monitoring subsystem: it performs the centralized display of the
environment parameters and power parameters of all network elements. It can
send control commands to environment equipment and power equipment and
can configure the alarm points of environment parameters and power
parameters.
Transmission management subsystem: it provides graphic management and
control of the OptiX active optical transmission system and PON passive optical
transmission system.
OMC 2000 implements the centralized management of multiple BAMs, and sets
up TCP/IP connection with multiple BAMs simultaneously. It can manage and
control multiple products and nodes and support multiple versions, as shown in
Figure 6-16.

95
Technical Manual
Centralized
environment monitoring
Wireless
management
Table of Contents
Centralized alarming
Data
management
Maintenance
Centralized
Performance statistic
Test
OMC 2000
WAN/LAN
...
BAM
SDH
BAM
BAM
BAM
Figure 6-16 Service-based management-- OMC 2000 networking mode
Centralized alarm console: it performs the centralized management of all BAM alarms.
Centralized environment monitoring console: it performs the centralized monitoring of
environment parameters and power parameters of all BAMs.
Centralized performance statistic console: it performs the statistical analysis and
centralized control of the operation of HONET equipment and communication service
quality in all BAMs.
Other service consoles: they perform the service management of the related BAM and
can start a different service console for a different BAM version.
II. Object-oriented management
Object-oriented management of HONET is based on different objects, such as board, V5

interface etc.
Objects
In object-oriented NMS, the objects refer to the physical equipment, logic targets or
managed objects.
Physical objects include network element, rack, frame and board.
Logical objects include the modules, V5 interface, 2M link, subscriber interface.
NM objects include the BAM and NM server.
Correlation between objects
In object-oriented NMS, objects are related to each other. Changes of the physical object
cause the changes of a series of physical object and logical object. For example, to delete
a physical object in the upper level may cause deletion of the physical object in the lower
level. Changes of logical object may not necessarily cause the changes of physical
objects. However, there are exceptions. For example, module deletion may lead to
deletion of the all the physical objects in the module, including the frames and boards.
General description of the objects and operations
NE: operations with the NE include adding, deleting, querying and modifying NE name,
adding racks, adding/deleting environment monitoring configuration, setting monitored

96
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
power types and number, querying NE environment parameters, querying history status
of the environment parameters, querying unrecovered alarms.
Rack: operations with the rack include adding, deleting, modifying rack list number,
querying unrecovered alarms.
Frame: operations with the frame include adding, deleting, querying tested frames,
modifying frames, querying frame clock status, configuring PCM, querying unrecovered
alarms.
Board: adding, deleting, querying board configuration data, querying board status,
resetting board, board switchover, system reset, system loading, querying host version.
The last three operations can only be made with the main control boards. Operations with
the board also include querying TSS status, setting loopback, adding test commands,
querying subscriber interface status,
interface,
resetting subscriber interface, querying/resetting/loopback MTA,
querying/resetting/loopback TA128, querying board TA128, configuring 16KC/12KC
subscriber equipment parameters, configuring analog subscriber interface attributes,
configuring ATM service, configuring subrate services, configuring VF interface service,
configuring CDI board interface attributes, configuring N64k interface, configuring T1
interface, blocking boards, loading boards, querying information in board buffer,
configuring PCM, configuring order wire links, testing boards, activating boards,
querying channels, enabling E1 loopback, E1 TS loopback, interface loopback and
terminal loopback, etc.
Module: Operations with modules include adding/deleting/querying/modifying clock
synchronization mode, system reset, system switchover, configuring/querying module
maintenance parameters, configuring module interface parameters, querying module
attributes, configuring module attributes, querying alarms.
V5 interface: operations with V5 interface include adding/deleting/modifying/querying
interface status, reset V5 interface, restarting PSTN, disable V5 interface, querying
logical communication channel status in V5 interface, verifying reallocation, start
reallocation, disable reallocation, configuring ringing mode, querying unrecovered alarm.
2M link: operations with 2M link include adding/deleting/modifying 2M link
configurations, querying 2M link status, blocking/unblocking/resetting 2M link,
requesting link status authentication, querying in batch status of 2M link,
blocking/unblocking in batch status of 2M link, resetting in batch 2M link.
C channel: Operations with C channel include adding/deleting/modifying/querying V5
interface protective switchover.
Semi-permanent connection: operations with the semi-permanent connection include
adding/deleting/modifying V5 semi-permanent connection, querying V5 semi-permanent
connection, establishing/clearing semi-permanent connection etc.
Subscriber interface: operations with the subscriber interface include querying
configurations, status of the subscriber interface, adding/modifying/deleting subscriber
interface.
Logical frame: operations with logical frame include adding/deleting/modifying/querying
frame status, querying/modifying clock source status.
NE connection: querying/modifying/deleting/adding connections among Nes.
Router among modules: operations include querying/deleting/adding routes among
modules.


97
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Environment power: querying environment status, power status, querying power control
mode, querying battery charging mode, enabling/disabling power module, configuring
fan switch, intelligent output control, and sensor.
Networking of object-oriented management
Object-oriented NMS consists of Server and Client.

SERVER: It is connected to BAM and Client through TCP/IP. It is the bridge for system
information processing. It maintains and monitors the network performance, and saves
and processes network alarms in form of SYBASE. Server provides unified MML
interface for connection with the local NMS.
CLIENT: It is connected to Server or BAM through TCP/IP. All object-oriented
management is implemented in the Client.
The common system networking are BAM networking, Server networking and cascade
Server networking.
1)
2)
BAM networking: Client is directly connected with a BAM through TCP/IP, and
makes maintenance of it. Such networking is simple, and is applicable for local
maintenance.
Figure 6-17 illustrates the Server networking.
...
BAM1
BAMn
UIClient
NCP
UIServer
Database
...
UIClient1
UIClientm
Figure 6-17 Server networking
Information saved in the database include: user authority information, alarm information,
operation log, network topology (NE topology is saved in BAM). A Server can be
connected to a maximum of 16 BAM. One Client can only make operations with one
BAM at one time, but it can collect alarm information of all BAM.
3)
Figure 6-18 illustrates networking of cascade Server.

98
Technical Manual
BAM1
...
Table of Contents
BAMn
BAM(n+m)
...
BAMb
...
NCP
NCP
Server1
Client
Client
Server
Client1
Server x
Client n
Figure 6-18 Cascade server networking
Cascade Server networking enables maintenance of a large amount of BAM. The master
Server can be attached with BAM. When it is not attached with BAM, it provides the
function of routing selection and message transparent transmission. It supports one level
of cascade. HONET system can manages at most 128 BAMs. Such networking is
applicable for large-capacity centralized NM.
III. Implementation Modes
MML: man-machine language, which is a popular interface for the exchange of

information between the user and the system.
MML interface of the HONET NMS is designed based on ITU-T Z.3XX
recommendations. It implements comprehensive monitoring of the access equipment.
In real time monitoring, MML interface of BAM is able to make real time reports:
Alarm data report

Performance data report
Operation information report

In terms of control, MML provides the following services:
System management, data management, data configuration, maintenance configuration,

test management, alarm management, wireless management (ETS450, ETS1900),
environment and power monitoring and performance statistic etc.
MML interface can be used directly with TELNET or super terminal. But both of
these two modes require large amount of MML commands and related
parameters.
HONET NMS provides MML Client terminal. The terminal provides the following
functions:
Equipment connection function: it can check the equipment name, IP address and port
flexibly, and select them for login.
Command prompt function: it displays all command sets of the equipment currently
connected in the command tree mode according to the objects and functions so that the
user can check easily.
Command search function: it can make a fuzzy inquiry. After certain character is
inputted, commands with the character will be displayed for selection.

99
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Parameter prompt function: when a command is selected, it can display all parameters of
the command and prompt the user to input the corresponding values.
Parameter value limit: each parameter judges the type it can receive, and make
corresponding input control and selection prompt of the value range.
Parameter path control function: when parameters are saved on multiple paths, it should
be able to select different parameter paths according to the selection of the user.
Save function of command and results: it can record a certain amount of historical
commands and save the commands and the execution results.
On-line help: each command has detailed on-line help function so that the user can get
the necessary help in time, if necessary.

6.6 DAS Network Management

6.6.1 System Description
As the HONET access equipment provides multiple services, NMS of the HONET
system is supposed to be integrated and comprehensive. To meet the demands, HONET
is designed with DAS NM features.
6.6.2 Separation of Maintenance Authority
To implement the separation of service maintenance, HONET system will divide the
maintenance authority into three levels after DAS network management characteristics
are added.
Telecommunication User Level: it can only maintain traditional telecommunication
services and equipment of PSTN and ISDN and the related services, including related
alarms, but excluding DAS network management characteristics.
Data User level: it can only maintain DDN data service, including alarm of the related
service. It only has DAS network management characteristics.
Super administrator level: it can maintain all equipment and services, including DAS
NM.
Due to the modular structure of HONET network management system, it can support
both the unified management and the independent management of DDN service and
traditional telecommunication service after DAS network management characteristics are
added. The network management can be separated and combined so that the independent
maintenance of data service of the access network by the data office can be performed
flexibly.
6.6.3 DAS Network Management Functions
To enhance data service maintenance and solve the problems in the data service
maintenance, the following functions are implemented in DAS network management
system:
I. Logical topology diagram
The difference of the logical topology diagram from the original physical topology
diagram is that it uses the module (similar to the node concept in a node machine) as the
100
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
display unit because all modules are reciprocal for data service (inter-module relation in
the voice service has the cascade concept).
DAS network management can show the link status between modules in real time and
directly. It can also provide query to check the occupation of line resources between
modules and between frames of the module. Also it can make loop-back of E1 and
various time slots of E1 between modules and between frames of the module.
II. Management of outgoing link
Management of outgoing link provides convenient link maintenance of E1 link connected

between DDN and LE so as to know the link and locate a fault quickly and directly.
III. Subnet characteristics
Several modules managed by a BAM can be used as a subnet, which is interconnected

with various subnets in other places. Each subnet is maintained with their own network
management to provide query of the overall topology structure, set up, disconnect and
query international semi-permanent connection, inter-network semi-permanent
connection information test and route query function.
IV. Bit error test function of system internal link
Data service is sensitive to line quality. For a general understanding of the link quality,
the system provides loop-back of various links, ports and time slots etc. so as to test the
bit error of links.
6.7 External Interfaces

6.7.1 Centralized Line Test Interface
The integrated line test system is called 112 system/interface, 112 handling center in the
following section.
I. Centralized line test interface
Centralized line test system is a complete set of system used for testing subscribers. It is
generally composed of Centralized line test acceptance and handling center, test
equipment, LE or Centralized line test interface of AN.
Traditional local network subscribers are connected to switch through remote module.
112 system can be connected with the 112 interface in switch, to make tests with the local
subscribers through test equipment. The test equipment can be that of the 112 system, or
that in switch.
With the wide application of access network, AN subscribers need to be connected to the
local 112 system. As the interface in access system and local switch use the standard V5
interface, but V5 interface protocol does not have test commands, therefore access
network subscribers must be connected to the 112 system through the 112 interface in
access network instead of that in the switch.

101
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
II. Implementation of centralized line test interface at OLT side
In HONET access system, the test of subscribers is addressed by equipping each ONU
with one or more test equipment. The test equipment is responsible for the test of this
subscriber group. Multi-ONU networking forms an access network, which is managed by
the OLT. The OLT may be equipped with a test management terminal, which will be
responsible for the local management of the subscriber test in the whole AN. Meanwhile,
AN and Centralized line test system interfaces in compliance with the specifications of
Chinese telecommunications can be provided in BAM of OLT. And they have access to
Centralized line test concentrated acceptance and handling center to implement the
centralized acceptance and handling as well as test of the access network subscribers.
According to the Chinese telecommunication standard, the physical interface between
AN and Centralized line test system uses Ethernet interface and they communicate with
TCP/IP protocol. In addition to the Chinese telecommunication standard interface, the
interface between C&C08 exchange and Centralized line test system can be provided in
BAM at the same time. Thus HONET AN can be connected to Centralized line test
system without any interface modification to allow Centralized line test system to test
and manage the access network subscribers. The test equipment of HONET access
network can be Huawei test board (TSS), which can test the internal and external lines of
subscribers and also the subscriber terminals. It can also be the test head equipment of
other Centralized line test manufacturers.
Huawei test board and test unit can make tests with both external cables, internal cables
and subscriber terminal. When you use test header (for example ACB), it is required to
configure a dismountable test module (namely CTC) for connection with 112 handling
center. It is used to provide standard interface for 112 system, and manages test
equipment in the access network. If you use test board, it is not required to configure
CTC. There are three test ways depending on different test equipment and subscriber
requirement.
1)
All use of ACBs
Huawei ACB is designed to be a small high-precision test device. Figure 6-19 illustrates
the networking of 112 interface when ACB is used.
112 handling
center
ACB
CTC
ONU
V5.2
BAM
SDH/PDH
LE
OLT
ONU
ACB
Figure 6-19 HONET centralized line test interface when ACB is used
102
ONU
ACB
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
CTC is a test interface facility. It controls and releases the test bus through BAM, and
sends test commands to ACB to make tests. CTC and ACB communicate through dial-up
Modem. ACB has a built-in Modem. Features of such networking are as follows:
Comprehensive test functions: it can make 12 items of test, including DC current, AC
current, insulation resistance, capacitance. The test results are the basis for fault
maintenance.
Short test time: test time for each line is less than 5 seconds.
Wide series of fault types: it provides 16 fault types, and can differentiate fault types.
Subscriber circuit tests include: dial-up tone test, loop circuit test, pulse test, feeding
current.
Subscriber terminal tests include loop resistance test, pulse performance test, sending
signaling tone (such as dial-up tone, ringing back tone and busy tone).
CTC can be interconnected with Huawei 112 service console, or other 112 handling
center by other manufacturers.
2)
All use of TSSs
In Centralized line test interface of AN, TSS board can be used to fulfill the test task. If
TSS board is used, the connection of the Centralized line test interface of the HONET
AN is shown in Figure 6-20.
112 handling
center
ONU
TSS
V5.2
BAM
SDH/PDH
LE
ONU
TSS
OLT
ONU
TSS
Figure 6-20 HONET Centralized line test interface when TSS is used
Centralized line test acceptance and handling center directly sends test commands to
BAM of access network. BAM controls TSS on ONU and complete the test task. This
type of networking has the following features:
Makes full use of the built-in TSS board in the ONU without the need for extra test
heads, thus reducing the cost.
Test accuracy and speed can meet the test requirements of general subscribers.
3)
112 interfaces in the HONET access network configured with both test units
and TSS board
In HONET access network, the 112 test interface can be formed in a hybrid way by test
units and TSS cards. The hybrid HONET 112 interface networking of test units and TSS
cards is as shown in Figure 6-21.

103
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
112 handling center
ACB
CTC
ONU
BAM
LE
V5.2
ONU
SDH/PDH
TSS
OLT
ONU
TSS
Figure 6-21 The hybrid HONET 112 interface networking of test units and TSS cards
This networking mode can satisfy requirements for cost-performance ratio. For large
capacity ONU (thousands of subscribers), test unit can meets the high precision and
speed requirements; for small capacity ONU, the test with TSS cards can avoid source
waste.
In this test mode, 112 handling center sends test commands to CTC for determining
whether to use test unit ACB or TSS card.
If TSS board is selected, test commands will be directly sent to BAM which controls the
testing process.
If test unit is selected, CTC sends test bus request command to BAM. After acquiring test
bus, CTC sends test command to test unit to execute test. After test, CTC must release
test bus via BAM.
The features of this networking mode:
Flexible configuration which not only saves investment, but also meets the strict
requirements for precision and speed.
Interconnection with 112 handling system by other manufacturers.
III. Multi-OLT going through the centralized line test interface
When Centralized line test interface of HONET access network is connected to the local
Centralized line test system according to the Chinese Telecom specifications, the
Centralized line test centralized center or its end office is generally connected directly to
the BAM in OLT through the TCP/IP. The Centralized line test centralized acceptance
and handling center and the end office unit act as the clients, and the Centralized line test
interface SEVER in BAM is used as the server.
In multi-OLT mode, various OLTs are independent of each other. Centralized line test
acceptance and handling center or the end office unit need to be connected to the BAM of
each OLT to test subscribers in different OLTs. The Centralized line test system also
determines to which OLT a subscriber belongs.
As the AN subscriber numbers are allocated randomly, it will be difficult for Centralized
line test centralized line test center to determine OLT according to the subscriber'
s
complaint number. To reduce the operation load in route selection when the centralized
line test center sends the test commands, HONET access network also can provide


104
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
separate NCP software as the unified Centralized line test interface software for multiple
OLTs.
When receiving the telephone complaint from a subscriber, Centralized line test
acceptance and handling center will first determine whether the faulty telephone is an
access network subscriber according to the telephone number. If it is, Centralized line test
center will determine at which AN the faulty telephone set is located. If it is located at
HONET AN, the Centralized line test center only needs to send the test command to
NCP. And the NCP software will be responsible for the selection of the test route of the
faulty telephone subscriber in its area. It will send the commands to the Centralized line
test interface program of the BAM in the related OLT after dividing and regroup them.
The network structure is shown in Figure 6-22 when NCP software is used:
OLT
112 center
NCP server
LAN / WAN
LAN / WAN
OLT
OLT
Figure 6-22 Network structure when NCP software is used
General operating procedure of NCP software: The database used by the NCP software
includes the number information of all OLTs at the exchange and BAM information of
the related OLTs. When receiving a test command from Centralized line test centralized
acceptance and handling center, it will first check in the database to determine to which
BAM(s) of the OLT the command will be sent. For whose a corresponding OLT cannot
be found, it will form a vacant number and return it directly. For whose a corresponding
OLT can be found, it will be divided and regrouped to build several command frames that
are sent to different OLTs through command dividing and regrouping. When having
received the test results returned by the BAM, it would determine the corresponding test
command according to the command serial number in the results, and then send it to the
corresponding Centralized line test client connection. Since NCP only performs the
routing, command dispatching and transparent transmission, the command and result
format between the Centralized line test system and the NCP and between the NCP and
each BAM are still the same. For BAM, it is not necessary to care about which
networking plan will be adopted. In this way, NCP software and versions that support
Centralized line test Chinese telecommunication specification protocol can be used
together. If the NCP software is not used, Centralized line test can still be done as long as
the Centralized line test center can distinguish the OLT to which the command will be
sent and the BAM connected to OLT.
Other than common test mode through phone number positioning, with the development
of access network, LAN 97 database begins to include system data for AN subscribers,
so by acquiring other data for AN subscribers in 97 database, 112 handling center can
use other positioning modes for sent test commands such as V5 interface ID mode or
protocol address mode. NCP software also can select test command route by the V5

105
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
interface ID included in test command under the circumstance that different AN offices
use different V5 interface IDs.
The NCP software includes a set of processes running under SCO UNIX and a
maintenance program running under Windows95. It uses the Sybase database
management system.
With the providing of number allocation interfaces and Windows97 interfaces by NCP
software, the data consistency of NCP database, OLT database and the switch will be
beneficial to the extensive application of NCP software.
IV. Description of test equipment

1)
TSS board
Basic functions
Test of subscriber lines: it is used to test 12 indexes of subscriber lines, such as DC

voltage, AC voltage, insulation resistance and capacitance etc. It provides 15 qualitative
conclusions, including touching power line, A-line touching, B-line touching, double-line
touching, A-line touching ground, B-line touching ground, A/B-line touching ground,
self-touching, poor insulation between A line and B line, electric leakage of A-line to
ground, electric leakage of B-line to ground, electric leakage of A/B-line to ground, line
broken, subscriber not on hook and normal.
Test of subscriber circuits: it is used to test the indexes of the subscriber circuits, such as
feed, tone (dialing tone, busy tone and ring back tone), number receiving (pulse and dual
tone), feed function, polarity and ringing etc.
Test of subscriber telephone sets: it is used to test the sending of tone (including the
dialing tone, busy tone and ring back tone), ringing, polarity reversal signal, the loop
resistance and dialing (pulse and dual tone) of telephone sets.
2)
Major technical indexes
a. Indexes of subscriber line test

DC voltage (A-G, B-G, A-G):
Measurement range: 0.1~500V

Measurement error: 3
AC voltage (A-G, B-G, A-B):
Measurement range: 0.1~300V(RMS)

Measurement error: 3%
Insulation resistance (A-G, B-G, A-B):
Measurement range: 10~10M

Measurement error: 10~0.2M 5%; 0.2~10M 10%
Capacitance (A-G, B-G, A-B):
Measurement range: 0.01~10uF

Measurement error: 0.01~0.2uF 5% 0.2~10uF 10%
b. Indexes of subscriber circuit test
Pulse dialing:
Make-break ratio: (1.60.2):1

Pulse speed: 101pps
Number interval: 500ms
3)
Dual tone dialing:
Frequency deviation: 1.5%

Level: low frequency group: -93dBm
High frequency group: -72dBm

106
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Level difference of dual-band signals: 21dBm

Total distortion: 20dB lower than the base wave level
Signal time limit: > 40ms/bit
Signal time interval: > 40ms
c. Indexes of subscriber equipment test

Ringing current:
Voltage: 75V15V (RMS)

Frequency: 25Hz3Hz
Break-make ratio: 1000s 300s
Time deviation: 5%
Signal tone (450Hz):
Frequency: 450 Hz25Hz

Level: -103dBm
Harmonic wave: <10%
Busy tone: make/break time 350ms:350ms 350ms
Time deviation <10%
Ring back tone: make/break time 4s:1s
Time deviation <10%
Pulse dialing test:
Dialing speed: 5~22pps

Break-make ratio:
Measurement range: (1.0~3.0)m: 1
Dual tone dialing performance test:
a. Frequency range:
Low frequency group: 697, 770, 852, or 941 Hz
High frequency group: 1209, 1336, 1477 or 1633 Hz
2% reliable receiving
3%, no receiving
2%~3%, not sure for receiving
b. Level
When operating at dual frequencies, the receiving range at a single frequency: -4~ 23dBm
When operating at dual frequencies, level without operation at one frequency: -31dBm
Dual frequency level difference: 6dBm
Signal time limit: 80ms/bit
Signal time interval: 40ms

Polarity reversal:
Time interval: 5s
Time deviation: 5%
Howler tone
Frequency: 950Hz50Hz
Level: 0dBm~20dBm
Harmonic wave: <10%
Measurement of loop resistance
Measurement range: 0~3k


107
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Test speed: time for testing the 12 indexes of subscriber lines is less than 10 seconds.
Time for testing subscriber circuits depends on the number of test items.
4)
ACB
ACB is a small-capacity test equipment designed by Huawei. It features high precision,

fast response and cost effectiveness.
i. Basic functions
Subscriber line test: It makes 12 items of quantitative tests with the subscriber lines,
including the AC current, DC current, insulation current, insulation resistance,
capacitance etc. It analyzes the fault causes, and differentiates fault types in external
cables.
Subscriber circuit test: the tests items include dial-up tone test, loop circuit test, pulse
test, connection test and feeding current test.
Subscriber terminal test: the tests include loop resistance test, pulse performance test,
signal tone test (including dial-up tone, ringing back tone, busy tone). The test modes
consist of manual interception, insertion and manual interactive test.
Expansion capability: ACB is designed with modular structures, which consists of
communication module and test module. ACB can be used in the following remote test
modules, including TDR time zone location module, external test module, subscriber
interface test module, terminal test module.
ii. Major technical indexes
a. Indexes of subscriber line test
DC voltage (A-G, B-G, A-B):


AC voltage (A-G, B-G, A-B):
Measurement range: 0.1~300V(RMS)

Insulation resistance (A-G, B-G, A-B):
Measurement range: 10~10M

Measurement error: 10~0.2M 5%; 0.2~10M 10%
Capacitance (A-G, B-G, A-B):
Measurement range: 0.01~10uF

b. Indexes of subscriber circuit test
Loopback current

Pulse dialing:
Make-break ratio: (1.60.2): 1

Pulse speed: 101pps
Number interval: 500ms
Dual tone dialing:
Frequency deviation: 1.5%

Level: low frequency group: -93dBm
High frequency group: -72dBm
Level difference of dual-band signals: 21dBm
Total distortion: 20dB lower than the base wave level
Signal time limit: > 40ms/bit

108
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Signal time interval: > 40ms

c. Indexes of subscriber equipment test

Ringing current:
Voltage: 75V15V (RMS)

Frequency: 25Hz3Hz
Mark-break ratio: 4s: 1s
Time deviation: 5%

Signal tone (450Hz):
Frequency: 450 Hz25Hz

Level: -103dBm
Harmonic wave: <10%
Busy tone: make/break time 350ms: 350ms
Time deviation <10%
Ring back tone: make/break time 4s:1s
Time deviation <10%
Pulse dialing test:
Dialing speed: 5~22pps

Break-make ratio: Measurement range: (1.0~3.0)m : 1
Dual tone dialing performance test:
a. Frequency range:
Low frequency groups: 697, 770, 852 and 941 Hz
High frequency groups: 1209, 1336, 1477 and 1633 Hz
2% reliable receiving
3%, no receiving
2%~3%, not sure for receiving
b. Level
When operating at dual frequencies, the receiving range at a single frequency: -4~ 23dBm
When operating at dual frequencies, level without operation at one frequency: -31dBm
Dual frequency level difference: 6dBm
Signal time limit: 80ms/bit
Signal time interval: 40ms

Polarity reversal:
Time interval: 5s
Time deviation: 5%
Measurement of loop resistance
Measurement range: 0~3k

Test speed: test time for each channel is less than 5 seconds.
6.7.2 MML Interface
I. Basic performances of MML
MML provides a uniform interface, which is easy to learn and use for both learners and
experts. MML enables all users to input commands and explain the output easily.

109
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
MML is flexible. It can make the system design optimum according to the specific tasks,
including direct input, menu and tables.
MML can be written in any language to be applicable for any personnel and meet the
requirements of any organization.
MML is structured to be perfectly combined with new technologies.
With a flexible structure, the MML has no limitation on the terminal type selected by
users, and meets different demands for security. MML interface has both the functions
required by the system and the functions required by users. During the implementation, it
is necessary to prevent the errors in commands or control activities from collapsing the
system, or excessively changing the system configuration or occupying the system
resources.
MML structure is expandable, so the addition of any new function or requirement will
not interfere its current functions. MML is a service-based man-machine interface. It is
not necessary for users to care about its internal structure and processing flow.
Although the telephone signaling and telephone exchange are considered as the main
application field of MML, these specifications are suitable to expand the MML to other
fields, such as data exchange, ISDN operation and maintenance and software
development environment. Many telecom equipment manufacturers in the world use
MML to maintain their telecom equipment. For the access network which is developing
very quickly in recent years, users also require for MML maintenance. At present, the
telecom users require for a unified network management systems. MML can provide a
kind of standard man-machine interface so that it can be easily connected to any network
management system.
II. MML interface of HONET access network
The MML interface of the HONET access network is provided by BAM. It is divided
into alarm port, performance port and maintenance port. The alarm port only provides
MML report of active alarm report. It can not make operational maintenance. The
performance port only actively reports the performance statistical data. And the
maintenance port performs all the maintenance operations. This port can also be set as
alarm report and performance report permitted with commands.
III. MML interface of HONET access network supporting TCP and serial port
10 maintenance ports, 4 alarm ports and 4 performance ports can be provided in TCP
mode.
4 maintenance ports, 1 alarm port and 1 performance port in the serial interface mode.
MML interface can be used directly through the TELNET or super terminal.
The input/output format of MML interface follows certain specifications, so it is an ideal
approach to use MML interface for network management access.

6.7.3 Q3 Interface
I. Functional structure of Q3 interface Agent of HONET network management
Q3 interface Agent system of HONET network management provides the agent service
of NE layer management function to the system manager. Its software functional modules
include MO Agent frame and Gateway, as shown in Figure 6-23:
110
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
GDMO
MIT
CMIP
cmip Response
cmip Event
E
R
Protocol
Stack
Communication gateway
M
A
N
A
G
Protocol gateway
cmip Request
Configuration
B
A
Alarm
C
K
Performance
E
N
D
D
E
V
I
C
E
Internal communication
mechanism of network
management platform
Figure 6-23 Functional structure of HONET Agent system
Explanations:
CMIP protocol stack: the protocol stack specified by Q3 interface.
MIT: management information tree is composed of the entities of various management
object classes (MOC). MO represents the managed resources.
GDMO: the information model file of the managed objects, which strictly follows ITU-T
specifications.
Gateway: it includes the communication gateway and the protocol gateway. The
communication gateway is responsible for communication between the MO Agent and
the background. The protocol gateway is responsible for protocol processing and
conversion so as to support multiple types of protocols between it and the background. In
this design, the processing of protocols is separated from the communication. They are
independent of each other and do not interfere with each other.
The following takes the processing flow of configuration, alarm report and performance
statistics as an example to explain the processing and implementation procedure of the
Agent function:

1)
2)
The configuration includes the creation, deletion, query and modification of the
case in the example, and the related processing of the equipment according to
these operations. The following is the description of a general processing flow:
Agent receives the CMIP request from the Manager and makes the
corresponding processing of the related MO attributes automatically according
to the CMIP request;
It is possible to generate the corresponding command for equipment processing
according to the specific service demand before or after the automatic
processing of the MO attributes;
The command is sent to the protocol gateway, then to the communication
gateway after being processed by the protocol gateway. And the
communication gateway sends the command directly to the equipment;
The result the equipment response is sent to MO Agent through the
communication gateway and protocol gateway.
Agent makes processing of MO or CMIP request according to the response
result.
Processing flow of the event reported when the equipment fails is as follows:
The equipment generates a fault and actively reports an alarm event.
The communication gateway receives an alarm frame.

111
Technical Manual
3)
Table of Contents
The protocol gateway processing function analyzes the alarm, localizes the
case, generates an alarm report and sends the report to the event processing
line protocol.
The event processing line protocol sends the event report to the Manager via
EFD.
The Manager receives this alarm through the protocol stack.
The processing flow of the performance statistical data is almost the same as
the alarm processing flow. But the performance statistic task is provided
through the command channel.
II. Physical networking diagram of HONET NMS Q3 interface

Q3
Manager
HONET
(Agent)
Ethernet
Router
WAN/LAN
HONET 1
HONET 2
HONETn
Figure 6-24 multiple access network equipment share one Q3-AGENT system
As shown in Figure 6-24, multiple access network equipment share one Q3-AGENT
system. This networking mode has the following features:
An Agent supports multiple HONET equipment.
The Manager manages multiple HONET equipment via one AGENT.
The system is convenient for maintenance. Upgrading of Agent will not interrupt the
operation of the network equipment.

112
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................ 114
7.1 Technical Specifications Applied in HONET System........................................................ 114
7.1.1 Technical Standards Involved in AN ...................................................................... 114
7.1.2 Specifications for AN Service ................................................................................. 114
7.1.3 Specifications for SDH Optical Transmission Equipment ...................................... 115
7.1.4 Specifications for PON Optical Transmission Equipment ...................................... 115
7.1.5 Specifications for Electro-mechanical Area............................................................ 116
7.2 Performance Indexes of HONET System ......................................................................... 117
7.2.1 SIPP System Resources and Capacity.................................................................. 117
7.2.2 Technical Indexes of HONET Interfaces................................................................ 118
7.2.3 HONET Electromechanical Indexes....................................................................... 142
7.2.4 HONET Clock System............................................................................................ 144
7.2.5 HONET System Reliability ..................................................................................... 146
7.3 Indexes of Transmission Technology ............................................................................... 146
7.3.1 Technical Indexes of SDH Optical Transmission Equipment................................. 146
7.3.2 Technical Indexes of HONET-PON16 Optical Transmission Equipment .............. 157
7.3.3 Transmission Indexes for Board-Embedded APDH Optical Transmission
Equipment ....................................................................................................................... 162
7.3.4 Transmission Indexes of CATV Module................................................................. 163
7.4 Protection Measures and Performance ............................................................................ 163
7.4.1 Protection Index of Main Distribution Frame (MDF)............................................... 163
7.4.2 Protection Indexes of Lightning Protection Box ..................................................... 163
7.5 Ground Requirements....................................................................................................... 164
7.6 Estimation of Power Consumption.................................................................................... 164
7.7 Indexes of ETS450WLL Wireless Access System ........................................................... 165
7.7.1 Frequency Range................................................................................................... 165
7.7.2 Coverage Area ....................................................................................................... 165
7.7.3 Traffic and Subscriber Capacity ............................................................................. 165
7.8 Indexes of ETS1900 Wireless Access System................................................................. 165
7.8.1 Frequency Range................................................................................................... 165
7.8.2 Coverage Area ....................................................................................................... 165
7.8.3 Traffic and Subscriber Capacity ............................................................................. 166

113
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications
7.1 Technical Specifications Applied in HONET System

7.1.1 Technical Standards Involved in AN
Standards applied in HONET system include the following standard organizations and
standards:
ITU-T
ETSI
IEEE
ANSI
IEC
ISO
EIA
International Telecom Union-Telecommunication Standard

European Telecommunication Standards Institute
Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
American National Standards Institute
International Electrotechnical Commission
International Standardization Organization
Electronic Industries Association
7.1.2 Specifications for AN Service

ITU-T G0.703
ITU-T G0.704
ITU-T G0.706
ITU-T G0.711
ITU-T G0.712
ITU-T G0.785
ITU-T G0.797
ITU-T G0.813
ITU-T G0.821
ITU-T G0.823
ITU-T G0.826
ITU-T G0.902
ITU-T G0.960
ITU-T G0.962
ITU-T G0.964
ITU-T G0.965
ITU-T G0.982
ITU-T I.430
ITU-T I.431
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T Q0.811
ITU-T Q0.812
ITU-T Q0.831
ITU-T Q0.921
Physical/electrical features of hierarchical digital interfaces

Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 kbit/s hierarchical
levels
Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame
structures defined in ITU-T Recommendation G.704
Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies
Transmission performance features of pulse code modulation channel
Features of a flexible multiplexer in a synchronous digital hierarchy environment
Features of a flexible multiplexer in a plesiochronous digital hierarchy environment
Timing features of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the
primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network
The control of jittering and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s
hierarchy
Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths
at or above the primary rate
Framework Recommendation on functional access networks. Architecture and functions,
access types, management and service node aspects
Access digital section for ISDN basic rate access
Access digital section for ISDN primary rate at 2048 kbit/s
V-Interfaces at the digital local exchange (LE) V5.1-interface (based on 2048 kbit/s) for the
support of access network (AN)
V-Interfaces at the digital local exchange (LE) V5.2 Interface (based on 2048 kbit/s) for the
support of access network (AN)
Optical access networks to support services up to the ISDN primary rate or equivalent bit
rates
Basic user-network interface -Layer 1 specification
Primary rate user-network interface -Layer 1 specification
Generic network information model
Timing features of primary reference clocks
Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization
networks
Fault and performance management of V5 interface environments and associated customer
profiles
ISDN user-network interface -Data link layer specification
114
Technical Manual
ITU-T Q0.931
GB 3378-82
GB 3380-82
GB6879
GB7611
GB/T15941
GF002-9002
TA015
TZ 016
YDN 020
YDN 021
YDN 034
YDN 061
YD/T767
YD/T768
Table of Contents
ISDN user-network interface layer 3 specification for basic call control

Technical requirements for subscriber signal mode of automatic telephone switching network
Technical requirements for the ringing and signal tone of automatic telephone switching
network
Technical requirements for 2048kbit/s 30-channel pulse code modulation multiplexing
equipment
Network digital interface parameters of PCM communication system
Requirements for the login of optical synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
General specification for telephone switching equipment issued by the Ministry of Posts and
Telecommunications
Technical system of optical synchronous transmission network
Technical system of digital data network (DDN)
Technical specifications for V5.1 interface between the local digital exchange and the access
network
Technical specifications for V5.2 interface between the local digital exchange and the access
network
Technical specifications for ISDN subscriber-network interface
Technical system of access network
Technical requirement for the optical digital line system of synchronous digital hierarchy
Technical requirement for the optical interface of synchronous digital series equipment and
system
7.1.3 Specifications for SDH Optical Transmission Equipment

ITU-T G0.703
ITU-T G0.707
ITU-T G0.773
ITU-T G.774.1~5
ITU-T G0.783
ITU-T G0.784
ITU-T G0.803
ITU-T G0.813
ITU-T G0.823
ITU-T G0.824
ITU-T G0.825
ITU-T G0.826
ITU-T G0.831
ITU-T G0.841
ITU-T G0.842
ITU-T G0.957
ITU-T G.958
M.3010
Q0.811
Q0.812

Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element
view
Features of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management
Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Timing features of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
hierarchy
hierarchy
The control of jittering and wander within digital networks which are based on the
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
The control of jittering and wander within digital networks which are based on the
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH)
Types and features of SDH network protection architectures
Interworking of SDH network protection architectures
Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
Principles for a Telecommunications management network
Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3 and X interfaces
Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3 and X interfaces
7.1.4 Specifications for PON Optical Transmission Equipment

ITU-T G0.703
ITU-T G0.707
ITU-T G0.825

Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
The control of jittering and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous
115
Technical Manual
ITU-T G0.957
ITU-T G.958
ITU-T G0.982
GB 6879
GB 7611
YDN 034
YDN 057
YDN 061
YD/T 536
YD/T 767
YD/T 768
TZ015
Table of Contents
digital hierarchy (SDH)

Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
Optical access networks to support services up to the ISDN primary rate or equivalent bit rates
Technical requirements and test method of 2048kbit/s 30-channel PCM multiplexing
equipment
Network digital interface parameters of PCM communication system
Specifications of ISDN subscriber-network interface
PON-based optical access network
Technical system of access network
Test method of network digital interface parameters of PCM communication system
Technical requirements for the optical interface of synchronous digital system equipment and
system
Technical requirements for the optical cable digital line system of synchronous digital system
Technical system of optical synchronous transmission network--technical system of the post
and telecom network of the Chinese Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications
Technical specifications for Passive Optical Network (PON)
7.1.5 Specifications for Electro-mechanical Area

I. Protection
ITU-T K.11
ITU-T K.20
IEC60664
IEC61312
IEC61643
YD/T694
YD/T1082
Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrent

Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltage and overcurrent
Insulation coordination of the equipment in the low voltage system
Anti-lightning electro-magnetic pulse
Surge protector of the low voltage system
Technical requirements and test method of the main distribution frame
Technical requirements for the over voltage and over current protection and
environment adaptation of the access network
II. Environment
IEC60721
ETS 300019
GB2423.1~3
GB4796
GB4797
GB4798
GB/T13426
GB/T13543
Classification of environment conditions

Environment condition and environment test of the communication equipment
Basic environment test procedure of electronic and electrical products
Categories of environment parameters and severity level of electronic and electrical
products
Natural environment conditions of electronic and electrical products
Application environment conditions of electronic and electrical products
Reliability requirements and test method of digital communication equipment
Environment test method of digital communication equipment
III. Structure
IEC60297
ETS 300119
19" series mechanical structure dimensions

Communication standard of European equipment
IV. Protection level of the equipment case

IEC 529
Environment protection level

116
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
V. Security
IEC 60950
GB4943
Security of information technology equipment, version 3

Security of information technology equipment (including electrical equipment)
VI. EMC
ETS 300386
CISPR 16-1
EN 55022
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-11
GB9254
GB/T17618
Requirements for electromagnetic compatibility of communication network equipment

Manual of radio frequency interference measurement instrument and test method
Test limit values and test method of information technology equipment radio frequency
interference features
Test method of electrostatic discharge protection
Test method of protection against radiation, radio frequency and electromagnetic field
Test method of electrical fast speed protection
Test method of surge protection
Test method of protection against conductive interference of radio frequency
electromagnetic field inductance
Test method of protection against voltage drop, short time interruption and voltage variation
Limit value and test method of radio jamming of information technology equipment
Limit value of Limit value and test method of immunity against interference of information
technology equipment
7.2 Performance Indexes of HONET System

7.2.1 SIPP System Resources and Capacity
The main control units in SIPP module include GV5 and PV8/PV4. Flexible
configuration is available for different demands. The main technical indexes of SIPP
module (for different main control configurations) are as follows:
I. System capacity
Table 7-1 Capacity of system subscribers
Type of main control
equipment
Recommended system capacity
GV5-III
4688 lines/module (R series networking), 8576 lines/module (V series networking)
PV8
1920 lines/module (V series ONU)
Note: The recommended system capacity is calculated according to the following principles:
Traffic of each subscriber line is no less than 0.07 Erl.

Each voice channel of V5 trunk is no less than 0.7 Erl.
16-channel subscriber board is used.
19-inch cabinets (ONU-F01A and ONU-F02A) are used for all ONUs. RSP
subscriber frames are used in R series ONUs and PV8/PV4 main control
frames and RSP extension frames are used in V series ONUs.
When hybrid networking of R series and V series ONUs is adopted, or the non19" cabinet ONU512 is used, the actual capacity will vary with specific
configuration.

117
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
II. 2M resource and V5 interface resource of the system

Table 7-2 2M resource of the system
Type of the main control
frame/subscriber frame
GV5-III
PV8/PV4
RSP
Independent V5 interface
resources or the sytem
E1 resources of the system

62E1s/module
16E1s/8E1s/module
0E1/2E1s/8E1s/frame
28interfaces/module
28interfaces/module
No
III. System call processing capability

Table 7-3 System call processing capability
Type of main control equipment
GV5-III
PV8
BHCA (busy hour call attempt)

180K/module
180K/module
IV. ONU Capacity

Table 7-4 ONU subscriber capacity
ONU Model
ONU512D
ONU-F01A
ONU-F02A-U
ONU-F02A-D
ONU160B
Capacity L of a single cabinet in full configuration (subscriber lines)

608 lines(RSP subscriber frame and 16-channel subscriber board)
80 lines (16-channel subscriber board), 160 lines (32-channel subscriber board)
624 lines (16-channel subscriber board)
V. Major technical indexes of BAM

Each BAM can manage 12 SIPP modules at most in serial port direct
connection mode and 22 SIPP modules in MCP card mode.
Each BAM can manage 254 network elements in maximum.
Each BAM supports 64 subscribers to log in simultaneously.
The max. capacity of a BAM is 75000 subscribers.
Historical alarm file of a BAM is 1G at most.
Event alarm capacity: 20000 pieces. Non removed fault alarm capacity: 20000
pieces.
Historical alarm time limit of BAM is 100 days.
Capacity of BAM operation log is 10000 pieces.
Capacity of test tasks at the test station: 1000 immediate test tasks 50 routine
test tasks.
7.2.2 Technical Indexes of HONET Interfaces

I. Technical Indexes of Z Interface
Technical indexes of Z interface (also called FXS in the private network) include
requirements for impedance features and transmission capacity.
1)
Impedance features of Z interface
2-wire analog Z interface of analog subscriber board refers to the interface connected
with analog subscriber line. Impedance features of Z interface is expressed by Return
Loss (RL). Requirements for impedance features are as follows:
118
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Impedance Return Loss
For an impedance test circuit as shown in Figure 7-1, RL of the Z interface should meet
the requirements shown in Figure 7-2.
680 ohm or 560 ohm
200 ohm
0.1u
Figure 7-1 Test circuit of Z interface impedance

dB
18
RL
14
300
2000
500
3400Hz
Frequency
Figure 7-2 Min. Value of RL for impedance test circuit

Relative level of the interface point
The relative input level of the interface point Li =0 dB.

The relative output level of the interface point Lo: local call Lo= -3.5dB;
Toll call Lo= -7dB
Allowed deviation of relative level: relative level of the input end -0.3~-0.7dB
relative level of the output end: +0.3~-0.7dB
Unbalanced impedance to ground
Unbalanced impedance to ground reflects the unbalance to the ground of the impedance
of the 2-wire port respectively. The longitudinal conversion loss generated on the analog
2-wire interface point due to the unbalance to the ground should meet the requirements
shown in Figure 7-3.
Longitudinal conversion loss
dB
46
40
30
20
10
0
300
600
Frequency
Figure 7-3 Technical requirements for unbalanced impedance to ground

119
3400 Hz
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Terminal balanced RL
Terminal balanced RL refers to the RL caused by unbalance of terminal network.

Terminal balanced RL of Z interface should meet the requirements shown in Figure 7-4.
And under the possible conditions (including short circuit, open circuit and inductive
terminal load) at the 2-wire interface in normal working state, terminal balanced RL of Z
interface, in 200~3,600 Hz frequency range, should be larger than 2dB.
dB
Terminal balanced RL
20
16
300
500
Frequency
2500
3400Hz
Figure 7-4 Technical requirements for terminal balanced RL

2)
Technical requirements for transmission indexes of Z interface
According to the Technical Specifications of Telephone Switching Equipment by Ministry

of Posts and Telecommunications, the technical requirements for transmission indexes of
Z interface are as follows:
Relative level of the interface
Definition: level loss from input port to output port.

Index: input connection (A-D), generally, 0dB.
Output connection (D-A) Local -3.5dB Toll -7dB
Permissible deviation of relative level: Relative level of the input end: -0.3 ~ -0.7dB
Relative level of the output end: +0.3 ~ -0.7dB
Distortion of loss frequency
Definition: The attenuation deviation of different frequency sinusoid signals in the

channel in relation to the reference frequency 1020Hz and input power level -10dBm0 is
defined as frequency loss distortion.
Index requirements: frequency loss distortion of Z interface should meet the index shown
in Figure 7-4.

120
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
dB
1.7
1.5
Loss
1.0
0.75
0.7
0.45
0.35
-0.3
0.2 0.3 0.4
0.6
1.0
2.0
Frequency
2.4
3.0
3.4
kHz
a.Input connection
dB
1.7
1.5
Loss
1.0
0.75
0.7
0.45
0.35
-0.3
0.2 0.3 0.4
0.6
1.0
2.0
Frequency
2.4
3.0
3.4
kHz
b. Output connention
Figure 7-5 Frequency loss distortion index of 2-wire analog connection

Variation of gain with input level
Definition: the gain deviation of different level sinusoid signals at 1020Hz frequency in
the channel in relation to -10dBm0 gain is defined as the variation of gain with input
level.
The technical indexes meet the requirements of Figure 7-6:

121
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
dB
Gain variation
1.6
0.6
0.3
0
-55
-50
-40
+8
-10
-0.3
dBm0
Input level
-0.6
-1.6
Figure 7-6 Index of gain versus input level

Group delay and group delay distortion
Definition: The min group delay, in 500~2,800Hz frequency range, is the absolute group
delay. The absolute group delay of 2-wire analog input (or output) semi-connection of Z
interface: the average is no larger than 1500s and 95% cannot exceed 1950s. Group
delay distortion refers to the delay variation with frequency. Min group delay as
reference, input or output group delay distortion, in 500~2,800Hz frequency range,
should meet the requirements shown in Figure 7-7.
Requirements for technical indexes:
us
Group delay distortion
900
750
450
150
0
500
600
1000
Frequency
2600
2800 Hz
Figure 7-7 Limit of group time delay versus frequency

Discrimination of out-of-band signal at input end
Definition: Any sinusoid signal at the frequency higher than 4.6kHz and with proper level
(-25dBm0) is added to the input of the channel as the minimum requirement. The level of
any mirror frequency generated at the output of the channel should be 25 dB lower than
122
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
the test signal level. This item tests the suppression of out-of-band input signal. This item
is to measure the suppression of outband input signal.
When a sinusoid signal of -25dBm0 level with a frequency higher than 4.6kHz is applied
at input end, the signal level of any mirror frequencies at output end should be at least
25dB lower than the input signal level.
Weight noise
Definition: weight noise of the channel measured at the output when there is no input
signal and a nominal impedance is connected to the input. This index reflects noise when
the audio channel is not seized i.e. no service.
Coding end: less than -67dBm0p
Decoding end: less than -70dBm0p
Total distortion
Definition: Total distortion is measured by signal-noise ratio. In simple words, it is to

measure noise when signal exists in the channel. The essential part total distortion is
quantizing distortion which is the signal distortion generated in signal measurement, so
total distortion can be used to evaluate the quality of PCM CODEC.
Requirements for the technical indexes are as shown in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5 Requirements for total distortion indexes of Z interface
Transmitting level
dBm0
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-45
Input connection
Li-0
35
35
35
32.9
24.9
19.9
Output connection
L0- -3.5
35
35
34.4
30.6
21.7
16.7
L0- -7.0
35
35
33.8
28.8
19.5
14.5
Crosstalk
Definition: Crosstalk refers to the harmful transmission from one channel to another
channel. The channel transmitting signal is called the crossing channel, while the
interfered channel is called the crossed channel. Crosstalk is to express the mutual
interference between channels.
Input connection: Near-end crosstalk generally doesn'
t exceed -70dBm0, and the far end
crosstalk doesn'
t exceed -73dBm0.
Output connection: Near-end crosstalk generally doesn'
t exceed -70dBm0, and the far
end crosstalk doesn'
t exceed -73dBm0.
Note:
The above technical requirements are the indexes when Z interface is semi-connected. For equipment
which can not receive and transmit signals through the digital port, A-A technical indexes can be
combined according to A-D and D-A technical requirements.
3)
Other technical requirements for Z interface

123
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Loop resistance and feeding current: Z interface support 2,000 loop resistance
and 20mA constant feeding current. For the overseas market, Z interface also
supports feeding current of 47mA, 35mA, 21mA, 16mA etc.
Ringing current: 25Hz3Hz sinusoid signal, harmonic wave distortion 10%,
virtual value of output voltage 75 15V, supporting 1s-make-4s-break ringing
tone. Many special ring modes are provided for overseas market.
Signal tone: Dialing tone, 450Hz, continuous tone; busy tone, 450Hz, 0.35smake-0.35s-break 0.7s intermittent tone; ring back tone, 450Hz, 1s-make-4sbreak 5s intermittent tone.
Support reversed charging pulse and 16KC/12KC charging pulse.
AC impedance is adjustable. It supports 7 types of interface impedance: 200
+680 //100nF, 200 +560 //100nF, 600, 150 +510 //47nF, 220 +820
//115nF, 220 +820//120nF and 900.
There are two settable receiving gain -3.5dB and -7dB. For overseas market,
board (CB36ASL) transmitting provides three settable gains 3dB, 0dB and 3dB; receiving provides five settable gains 0dB, -3.5dB, -7dB, -8.5dB and 12dB.
II. 2/4 wire E&M interface
The impedance of 2/4 VF interface is 600, mainly used in dedicated point-to-point

transmission, whose technical indexes include relative level, frequency lost distortion,
level variation with input level, total distortion, idle channel noise and inter-channel
crosstalk. The technical requirement difference from Z interface impedance is: the 2/4 VF
interface only requires analog-analog (A-A) full connection indexes but not analogdigital (A-D) semi-connection or D-A semi-connection indexes. So the following indexes
are all A-A technical indexes.
1)
Relative level of the interface
2)
Distortion of loss frequency
Definition: The relative level of the interface refers to the relative transmission level. It is
the gain from one port to another port.
Technical index requirements: The sinusoid wave signal at the reference test frequency
1020Hz and with a level of -10dBm0 is added to the input end of the transmitting side.
The level deviation limit measured at the receiving end should be 0.6dB (4 wire -4
wire), 0.8dB (2 wire -2 wire).
The receiving /transmitting gains are adjustable, the gain adjustment scope is as follows:
For 2-wire: Receiving gain: -7~-2 dB
Transmitting gain: -15~0 dBm
For 4-wire:
Receiving gain: -11dB ~ +4 dB
Transmitting gain: -1 dB ~+14 dB
Definition: The attenuation deviation of different frequency sinusoid signals in the
channel in relation to the reference frequency 1020Hz and input power level -10dBm0 is
defined as frequency loss distortion.
Requirements for the technical indexes are as shown in Figure 7-8.

124
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
dB
Loss
3.0
2.0
1.5
1.1
0.7
-0.6
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.82 1.02
2.4
Frequency
2.8 3.0
3.4
kHz
a. 2-wire connection
dB
Loss
1.8
0.9
0.5
0
-0.5
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.82 1.02
Frequency
2.4
2.8 3.0
3.4
kHz
b. 4-wire connection
Figure 7-8 Indexes of loss frequency distortion

3)
Variation of gain with input level
Definition: the gain deviation of the sinusoid signals of different levels at the 1020Hz
frequency in relation to -10 dBm0 gain is defined as the gain variation with input level.
Requirements for the technical indexes are as shown in Figure 7-9.

125
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
dB
Gain variation
3.0
1.0
0.5
0
-55
-50
-40
-10
-0.5
+8
dBm0
Input level
-1.0
-3.0
Figure 7-9 Index of gain versus input level

4)
Idle channel noise
5)
Total distortion
Definition: weight noise of the channel measured at the output when there is no input
signal and a 600 impedance is connected to the input end. This index reflects noise
when the audio channel is not seized i.e. no service.
Two wires (fore wires): less than -65dBm0p.
Definition: Total distortion is measured by signal-noise ratio. In simple words, it is to
measure noise when signal exists in the channel. The essential part total distortion is
quantizing distortion which is the signal distortion generated in signal measurement, so
total distortion can be used to evaluate the quality of PCM CODEC. Different indexes are
required for different test signals. The former CCITT recommends sinusoid mode and
noise mode, which are not absolutely equivalent in a strict sense.
Requirements for the technical indexes are as shown in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6 Requirements for the total distortion indexes of 2/4-wire audio frequency interface
Transmitting level
dBm0
-55
-40
-34
-27
-20
-10
-6
-3
6)
Ratio of signal to the total distortion larger than (dB)

2 wire
11.1
26.1
30.7
32.4
32.4
32.4
32.4
24.8
Crosstalk
4 wire
12.6
27.6
32.2
33.9
33.9
33.9
33.9
26.3
Definition: Crosstalk refers to the harmful transmission from one channel to another
channel. The channel transmitting signal is called the crossing channel, while the
interfered channel is called the crossed channel. Crosstalk is to express the mutual
interference between channels.

126
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Near-end crosstalk generally doesn'

t exceed -65dBm0, and the far end crosstalk doesn'
t
exceed -65dBm0.
Note:
The above technical requirements are suitable for common 2/4 VF 600 interface (CB02VFB) but not
for the party-line port (CB03VFB) in railway dedicated network.
III. FXO interface
1)
Mechanical features of FXO interface
2)
Electrical features of FXO interface

FXO interface PCM coding: it is A law coding/decoding when it is provided by
H301CDI board. And it is law coding/decoding when it is provided by
CC01CDI.
Voice frequency indexes
FXO port consists of 2 wire, which are connected with line a and line b of the subscriber
board respectively.
2-wire receiving/transmitting level, gain-level features,

attenuation-frequency features test, idle channel weight noise, total
distortion and crosstalk are in compliance with ITU-T Recommendation
G.712.
Adjustment range of receiving/transmitting gain: -22~ -3dB for receiving and 8.5 ~ +13dB for transmitting, 0.5dBr for each step.
Ringing frequency: 25Hz ~ 3Hz Max. ringing voltage: 90Vrms
Ringing detection impedance: 0.22F+1k

Loop current: 16mA (8.6V)
3)
Iloop
60mA (54V)
Open circuit resistance: 100M (100V)
Functional features of FXO interface
HONET FXO interface is provided by H301CDI and CC01CDI boards. It mainly has the
following functions:
PCM coding/decoding
Ringing detection
Polarity, feed detection
Dialing function (dual tone, pulse)
IV. 2/4 wire E&M interface

1)
Mechanical features of 2/4-wire E&M interface
Signaling channel and voice channel of 2/4-wireline E&M interface are separated. One
port includes:
2/4 wire audio interface a. 2/4-wire audio frequency interface: 2 wires are a and
b lines with receiving and transmitting are performed in a pair of lines. 4 wires
are a, b, c and d lines. The receiving and transmitting use a pair of lines
separately.
E&M signaling E (rEceive or Ear) line is the receiving line and M (transMit or
Mouth) line is the transmitting line. E&M signaling has many categories: From
line number, it can be grouped into two lines (called 1E1M) and four lines
(called 2E2M).

127
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
In HONET system, it is ATI board that provides 2/4 E&M interface, supporting Bellcore
V-type interface. Each interface provides one E signaling line and one M signaling line,
supporting 2/4 VF channel.
2)
Electrical features of 2/4- wire E&M interface

VF interface impedance: 600 .
VF interface indexes: in compliance with ITU-T G.712 standard. The VF
interface can be adjusted via software, with an adjustable receiving gain range 20dB ~+1.5dB, an adjustable transmitting gain range +14 dB ~ -7 dB and step
length of 0.5dB.
Reliable detection current of E line: over 3mA, the general operating current is
9mA.
Current in M line: larger than 30mA if necessary; no current leakage in idle
state. The operating current depends on the resistance of transmitting line.
Equivalent circuit of E & M line interface
E
Internal resistance
Relay
Power supply with

constant voltage
Equivalent
circuit of M line
-48V
Equivalent
circuit of E line
Figure 7-10 Equivalent circuit of E & M line interface

3)
Functional features of 2/4-wire E & M interface

4-wire E&M mode
On ATI side, a and b are audio receiving/transmitting lines i.e. the receiving and
transmitting use a pair of lines. E is the line for receiving signaling and M is the line for
transmitting signaling.
2-wire audio E & M mode
On ATI side, a and b are audio receiving/transmitting lines i.e. the receiving and
transmitting use a pair of lines. E is the line for receiving signaling and M is the line for
transmitting signaling.
Functional description:
The line signals include seizing and acknowledgement. Sometimes, it also has seizing
confirmation. The register signal can be MFC, DTMF or DC pulse signal. E and M
connections are shown in Figure 7-11.
Live
T1
Caller M line
Occupation
acknowledgement
In-conversation state
No current
Live
No current
Caller E line
T2
T3
The called E line
T4
Figure 7-11 Schematic diagram of E and M connections

128
The called M line
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
There are not only DC signals of power and ground on E and M lines but also DC pulse
signal on them. When DC pulse signal is not used, but MFC or DTMF is used, these
signals will pass through the audio line.
V. Technical indexes of V.24 interface
1)
Mechanical features of V.24 interface
Mechanical features of V.24 interface subject to ISO2110 and the 25-core connector is
used for the interface. The standard case is that DTE interface provides male socket and
DCE interface provides female socket. If DCE and DTE are compatible, female socket is
recommended. DB25 pin allocation is shown in Figure 7-12:
Figure 7-12 DB25-pin signal definition of V.24 (V.28)/RS-232-D connector

2)
Electrical features of V.24 (RS232) interface
3)
Functional features of V.24 (RS232) interface
ITU-T Recommendation V.28 specifies the electrical features of V.24 interface as

unbalanced dual-current interface circuit.
For the unbalanced double current interface, the open-circuit voltage of signal source is
25V; load impedance is 3000 ~7000; load capacitance is 2500pF. For data circuit, the
binary bit is 1 when the voltage at the interface is lower than 3V and the binary bit is
0 when the voltage is higher than +3V. For control and timing interface circuit, it is in
ON state when the voltage is higher than +3V and it is in OFF state when the voltage
at the interface is lower than 3V. The interval between +3V and 3V is called jump
interval. The time when a signal lingers in the jump interval cannot exceeds 1ms or 3% of
bit element period. The shorter one is preferred.
Functional features of V.24 (RS232) interface is a subset of ITU-T Recommendation
V.24. It consists of the ground, control, clock and data functions. Each functional
definition is shown in the Table 7-7:

129
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-7 Functional definition of V.24 (RS232) interface

Functional
features
Clock signal
Data circuit
Ground circuit
Control circuit
DB25 pin
Abbreviation of pin
functions
V.24 circuit
number
Signal
direction
15
TC
114
DTEDCE
17
RC
115
DTEDCE
24
ETC
113
DTEDCE
2
3
TD
RD
103
104
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
14
TD_2
118
DTEDCE
16
RD_2
119
DTEDCE
PG
101
DTEDCE
7
4
5
6
8
20
SG
RTS
CTS
DSR
DCD
DTR
102
105
106
107
109
108.2
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
12
DCD_2
122
DTEDCE
13
CTS_2
121
DTEDCE
19
RTS_2
120
DTEDCE
18
25
LL
TM
141
142
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
21
RL
140
DTEDCE
22
23
RI
CH
125
111
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
Signal functions
Transmitting clock provided
by DCE
Receiving clock provided by
DCE
Transmitting clock provided
by DTE
Transmitting Date
Receiving Date
Auxiliary transmitting data
(Blue)
Auxiliary receiving data (Blue)
Protection ground/shielding
ground
Signal ground
Request for transmitting
Ready for transmitting
DCE ready
Carrier detection
DTE ready
Auxiliary carrier detection
(blue)
Auxiliary ready for
transmitting (blue)
Auxiliary request transmitting
(blue)
Local loop-back (brown)
Test mode (brown)
Remote loopback/Maintenance test
(brown)
Ringing indication (brown)
Data rate selection (brown)
"Transmitting" and "Receiving" in the circuit name defined by DCE-DTE

interface are sent from the point of DTE. 103 circuit is a circuit through which
the data is sent from DTE to DCE. On DCE side, it is still called data
transmitting circuit. In fact, DCE receives data signal from this circuit. Similarly,
104 circuit uses DCE to transmit data and uses DTE to receive data.
Control circuit is set up to implement communication and test protocol. DCD is
to detect the working state of communication lines and DCE devices. DSR is for
DCE to notice DTE whether it has been in working (enabled) state. DTR is for
DTE to notice DCE whether it has been in working (enabled) state. RTS and
CTS are to control the start or end of data transmission process between DTE
and DCE: If RTS is ON, it indicates DTE requests for data sending. if RTS is
ON and DCE agree on the request, CTS can be set to ON for positive response
to make DCE ready for receiving the data from DTE.
In V.24 synchronous communication interface, it is necessary to use DCE and/
or DTE to provide a clock signal. The clock signal is synchronized with the
digital circuit to ensure the correct identification and receiving of data. Time
sequence f the clock and data on the interface line is shown in Figure 7-13.

130
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Clock date
Figure 7-13 Time sequence of clock and data on V.24 synchronous interface line
4)
The auxiliary function usually cannot be enabled for V.24 interface for it does
nor provide blue auxiliary signal line as shown in Table 7-7. The interface
whose test function is provided by BAM also does not provide brown test signal
line as shown in Table 7-7.
Protocol features of V.24 interface
Protocol features of V.24 interface is defined in the proposals in ITU-T V.24.

VI. Technical indexes of V.35 interface
1)
Mechanical features of V.35 interface
Mechanical features of V.35 interface are defined by ISO2593. V.35 interface uses 34core connector. Pin definitions of the line connector are shown in Figure 7-14.
Figure 7-14 Pin signal definition of V.35 interface 34-core connector

2)
Electrical features of V.35 interface
Appendix 2 of ITU-T proposal V.35 specifies the electrical features of the clock and
digital signals of V.35 interface as balanced dual-current interface circuit. V.35 interface
control signal uses the unbalanced dual-current interface circuit specified in ITU-T
proposal V.28.
For the balanced double current interface, balanced twisted multi-pair cable is used for
interface line: feature impedance is 80~120, signal source impedance is 50~150 and
load impedance is 100 10. The normal voltage between two terminals each balanced
pair is 0.55V !20%. The binary bit is 1 when the voltage of terminal A is higher than
that of terminal B and the binary bit is 0 when the voltage of terminal A is lower than
that of terminal B. The risetime from 10% point to 90% point should be shorter than 1%
of signal element period or 40ns. The shorter one is preferred. The above requirements
131
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
are still applicable when the generator or load is connected with ground potential or
short-circuited or cross-connected with other interface circuit.
For the unbalanced double current interface, the open-circuit voltage of signal source is
25V; load impedance is 3000 ~7000; load capacitance is 2500pF. For data circuit, the
binary bit is 1 when the voltage at the interface is lower than 3V and the binary bit is
0 when the voltage is higher than +3V. For control and timing interface circuit, it is in
ON state when the voltage is higher than +3V and it is in OFF state when the voltage
at the interface is lower than 3V. The interval between +3V and 3V is called jump
interval. The time when a signal lingers in the jump interval cannot exceed 1ms or 3% of
bit element period. The shorter one is preferred.
3)
Functional features of V.35 interface
Functional characteristic of V.35 interface is a subset of ITU-T Recommendation V.24. It

consists of functions of ground, control, clock and data. Each functional definition is
shown in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Definition of V.35 interface function
Functional
features
Clock signal
Data circuit
Ground circuit
Control circuit
Control circuit
M34 pin
Abbreviations of
pin functions
V.35 circuit
Signal direction
number
RCA
115
DTEDCE
RCB
115
DTEDCE
TCA
114
DTEDCE
AA
TCB
114
DTEDCE
ETCA
113
DTEDCE
ETCB
113
DTEDCE
R
T
P
S
A
RDA
RDB
TDA
TDB
PG
104
104
103
103
101
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
SG
102
DTEDCE
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
RTS
CTS
DSR
DCD
DTR
LL
TM
105
106
107
109
108.2
141
142
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
DTEDCE
RL
140
DTEDCE
Signal functions
Receiving clock-A line
provided by DCE
Receiving clock-B line
provided by DCE
Transmitting clock-A line
provided by DCE
Transmitting clock-B line
provided by DCE
Transmitting clock-A line
provided by DTE
Transmitting clock-B line
provided by DTE
Receiving data -A line
Receiving data -B line
Transmitting data -A line
Transmitting data -B line
Protection ground
Signal ground, providing DC
reference potential
Request for transmitting
Ready for transmitting
DCE ready
Carrier detection
DTE ready
Local loop-back
Test mode
Remote loopback/maintenance test
"Transmitting" and "Receiving" in the circuit name defined by DCE-DTE

interface are sent from the point of DTE. 103 circuit is a circuit through which
the data is sent from DTE to DCE. On DCE side, it is still called data
transmitting circuit. In fact, DCE receives data signal from this circuit. Similarly,
104 circuit uses DCE to transmit data and uses DTE to receive data.
132
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Control circuit is set up to implement communication and test protocol. DCD is

to detect the working state of communication lines and DCE devices. DSR is for
DCE to notice DTE whether it has been in working (enabled) state. DTR is for
DTE to notice DCE whether it has been in working (enabled) state. RTS and
CTS are to control the start or end of data transmission process between DTE
and DCE: If RTS is ON, it indicates DTE requests for data sending. if RTS is
ON and DCE agree on the request, CTS can be set to ON for positive response
to make DCE ready for receiving the data from DTE.
In V.35 synchronous communication interface, it is necessary to use DCE and/
or DTE to provide a clock signal. The clock signal is synchronized with the
digital circuit to ensure the correct identification and receiving of data. Time
sequence of the clock data on the interface line is shown in Figure 7-15.
Clock date
Figure 7-15 Time sequence of clock and data transmitted on V.35 line
4)
It is not necessary to provide the last three test signals in the Table 7-8.when
V.35 interface has the test function supported by the background.
Functional features of V.35 interface
Features of V.35 interface protocol are defined in ITU-T Recommendation V.24.

VII. G.703 Unidirectional 64kb/s interface
1)
Definition
Unidirectional interface refers to information transmitted between receiving and

transmitting equipment and its related timing information are transmitted in the same
direction, as shown in Figure 7-16.
G.703 unidirectional
interface
Equipment
Equipment
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
Message signal
Timing signal
Figure 7-16 Schematic diagram of G.703 64kb/s unidirectional data interface
Both the receiving and transmitting directions of G.703 unidirectional interface include
three types of signals:
64kb/s data signal
64kHz timing signal
8kHz timing signal
The receiving and transmitting use a pair of symmetrical lines separately.

G.703 64kb/s interface can use unidirectional interface or reversed interface, which is
specified as follows:
133
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
The unidirectional interface is used in the synchronization network and quasisynchronization network.
In the point to point communication, both the unidirectional interface and the
reversed interface can be used.
Note: Unidirectional interface and reversed interface cannot implement the connection
between input and output units. HONET only provides unidirectional interfaces.
2)
Nominal bit rate 64kbit/s
3)
Coding rules
A 64kb/s bit cycle is divided into 4 unit interval.
Binary "1" is programmed as code set of the following 4 bits: 1100. 1100
Binary "0" is programmed as code set of the following 4 bits: 1010. 1010
The binary signal is converted into three-level signal by converting the polarity
of the neighboring code sets alternatively.
th
Polarity of each 8 bit array is alternative, the damaged bit array represents the
last bit of the 8-bit array.
Signal transmission tolerance: 100ppm
Coding rules and steps are shown in Figure 7-17.

Bit number
64 kbit/s data
Steps 1 - 3
Step 4
Step 5
Violation
Violation
Octet timing
T1818730-92
Figure 7-17 Coding rules of G.703 64kb/s unidirectional interface

4)
Electrical features of the interface
Electrical features of G.703 64kbit/s unidirectional interface are listed in Table 7-9:
Table 7-9 Electrical features of G.703 64kbit/s unidirectional interface
Code rate
Nominal pulse shape
Wire pair in each direction (transmitting/receiving)
Test load impedance
Nominal pulse( mark) peak voltage
No pulse (space) peak voltage
Nominal pulse width
Index:
256kbaud
Comply with the template as shown in Figure
A symmetrical pair
120 resistive
1.0V
00.10V
3.9 S

134
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Index:
Pulse amplitude ratio of positive and negative pulses at the

center point of the nominal pulse
Pulse width ratio of positive and negative pulses at the
semi-amplitude point of the nominal pulse
0.95-1.05
0.95-1.05
V
1,0
0,5
3,12 s
(3,9 0,78)
3,51 s
(3,9 0,39)
3,9 s
4,29 s
(3,9 + 0,39)
6,5 s
(3,9 + 2,6)
7,8 s
(3,9 + 3,9)
a) Mask for single pulse
V
1,0
0,5
7,02 s
(7,8 0,78)
7,41 s
(7,8 0,39)
7,8
8,19 s
(7,8 + 0,39)
10,4 s
(7,8 + 2,6)
11,7 s
(7,8 + 3,9)
b) Mask for double pulse
Note The limits apply to pulses of either polarity.
Figure 7-18 Pulse template of G.703 64kbit/s unidirectional interface

135
T1818740-92
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
VIII. U interface (2B1Q)

1)
Definition
2)
Basic features of U interface

Line code
U interface is the interface of NT1 and LT in ISDN reference model. In terms of code
pattern, since subscriber line features are different in different countries, their line code
patterns also vary. For instance, North America and China use 2B1Q code, Japan and
Italy adopt AMI, while UK adopts 3B2T code. ITU-T has no recommended uniform
transmission mode and line code pattern for 2B+D U interface. The following description
is only applicable to 2B1Q code pattern.
Line code is 2B1Q (2-bit binary code is expressed with 1-bit quaternary code). This is a
4-level nonredundancy code.
Line baud rate: 80k baud
Clock tolerance
The tolerance of free-run NT1 clock is 100 ppm.

The tolerance of LT clock is 5 ppm.
Frame structure
A primary frame should be the 120 quaternary signals transmitted with nominal 1.5ms
interval. A primary frame include frame bit, 2B+D data bit and CL channel bit. 8 primary
frames (12ms in total) form a multi-frame.
3)
Specifications and program of U interface
The following is the bit allocation and function of multi-frame based on G.961
specification.
Monitoring function of CRC bit error
Bits M5 and M6 of the 3rd frame and 8th frame of each multi-frame comprise the CRC,
which are inserted into bit flow via transmitter. In receiver, the CRC bit calculated from
the same bits should be compared with the received CRC. If they are different, it
indicates that there is at least one bit error in the multi-frame.
EOC frame function
In each multi-frame, the Embedded Operational Channel (EOC) consists of 24 bits. It

implements the communication between the network and NT1. The following basic
functions are required for the EOC:
a. Operation of 2B+D loopback: this function commands NT1 to loop back the user data
bit stream toward the network.
b. Operation of B1 (or B2) channel loopback: This function requires NT1 to setup single
B channel loopback toward the network. Single B channel loopback can provide
maintenance on this channel and the subscriber services are not totally blocked.
c. Recovery to normal: this message is used to release all the uncompleted EOC
controlled operation, and reset the EOC message processor to its initial state.
d. Unfollowable acknowledgement: it shows that NT1 has received an EOC message, but
it is not in the menu of NT1.
e. Request degraded CRC notification: request to send degraded CRC toward the
network.
f. Degraded CRC notification: Inform NT1 the intentionally degraded CRC will be sent
from the network till Recovery to normal is cancelled.
g. Hold state
4)
Activation and deactivation of U interface

136
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
a. Activation: ITU-T Recommendation G.961 defines the signals generated by transceiver

during startup. These signals are used in two start types: cold start and hot start. When
NT1 and LT are in resetting state, the activation is allowed either from subscriber
equipment or from the network. The initiator sends single tone in compliance with ITU-T
Recommendation G.961 and starts activation process. In cold start mode, LT and NT1
should complete the synchronization within 15 seconds, with 5 seconds for NT1 and 10
seconds for LT; while in hot start mode, they should complete the synchronization within
300ms.
Deactivation: when one of the following happens, the transceiver is allowed to enter into
the reset state.
5)
Start can not be completed within 15 seconds (hot or cold start)

The received signal is lost for more than 480ms.
Synchronization is lost for more than 480ms.
Electrical features of U interface
Output pulse
The nominal peak value of output pulse is 2.5V. The pulse shape should be as shown in
Figure 7-18 and four-quaternary-characters pulse sample should be obtained from the
nominal sample as shown in Figure 7-18 multiplied by 2.5V, 0.83V, -0.83V or -2.5V.
The nominal average power is 13.5dBm when the signals are composed of synchronous
framing bits which are of same probability at other position.
Template of U interface pulse template is shown in Figure 7-19:
0.4T 0.4T
B = 1.05
C = 1.00
D = 0.95
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
0.01
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.03
0.01
0.12
0.05
+3
0.025 V
2.625 V
2.5 V
2.375 V
0.075 V
0.025 V
0.3 V
0.125 V
+1
0.0833 V
0.8750 V
5/6 V
0.79127 V
0.025 V
0.00833 V
0.1V
0.04167 V
1
0.0833 V
0.8750 V
5/6 V
0.79127 V
0.025 V
0.00833 V
0.1V
0.04167 V
3
0.025 V
2.625 V
2.5 V
2.375 V
0.075 V
0.025 V
0.3 V
0.125 V
T = 12.5 s
E = 0.03
A = 0.01
0.75T
F = 0.01
0.5T
A = 0.01
T
14T
50T F = 0.01
H = 0.05
G = 0.12
0.5T
T1814380-92/d33
Figure 7-19 Pulse template of U interface

Power spectrum density
The power spectrum of the transmitted signal is measure in the bandwidth of 1kHz noise
power, whose density upper limit should be as shown in Figure 7-20. The bandwidth of
1kHz noise power should be selected in determining whether the measurement is
qualified.

137
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
20
Power spectral density (dBm/Hz)
30
40
50 dB/decade
50
60
70
80
90
10
20
50
100
200
Frequency (kHz)
500 1000
T1814390-92/d34
Figure 7-20 Upper limit of the power spectrum density of the transmitted signal
Total transmission power
Feature Features: it is average power of the signals composed of framing character

sequence that has frame code character and are of equal probability in all other positions.
Index: The average power of signals formed by framing character sequence that has
frame code characters and are of equal probability characters in all other positions should
be between 13.0dB and 14.0dB in the range of 0Hz to 30kHz.
Applicable range: for all ISDN-BRA interfaces
Impedance and Return loss
Impedance: the impedance at the nominal driving point of the interface toward
NT1should be 135.
Return loss: RL relative to135 in the band of 1kHz to 200kHz is shown in Figure 7-21:

138
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
30
20 dB
Return loss (dB)
20
10
0 dB
25 kHz
10
1
10
250 kHz
50
100
Frequency (kHz)
500
1000
T1814410-92/d36
Figure 7-21 Return loss relative to 1kHz~200kHz frequency band

Longitudinal conversion loss
LCL=20Log (el/em) db
el=applied longitudinal voltage (relative to the safety ground)
em=metallic voltage generated by the 135 terminal (NT1 should be powered, but not be
activated during the test)
Index:
F<5Hz
LCL>20dB
5Hz<F<281.2Hz
LCL: +20dB/ deca-octave
281.5Hz<F<40000Hz
LCL>55dB
40000Hz<F
LCL: -20dB /10 times sound interval
Applicable range: for all ISDN-BRA interfaces
IX. E1 interface
1)
2)
General features of 2048kbit/s electrical interface

Bit rate: 2048kbit/s;
Bit rate tolerance: 50ppm;
Code: HDB3;
Over-voltage protection of input port and output port
The following tests can be done for the input and output ports without damaging them: 10
standard electrical pulses (5 negative pulses and 5 positive pulses) with the max.
amplitude of U1 (1.2/50 ms).
3)
Differential mode: U=20Vdc;

Common mode: U=100Vdc.
Specifications of 2048kbit/s interface
Output interface specifications are list in Table 7-10:

139
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-10 Specifications of the output interface

Pulse shape (the nominal shape
is rectangular)
Regardless of the symbol, all " Marks" of the

active signals should be in compliance with the
templates shown in Table 7-1 (In the Figure, V
corresponds to the nominal peak value)
Pair of wires in each transmission

direction
A coaxial pair
Test load impedance
75W resistive characteristic
Nominal peak voltage of the signal

pulse
Peak voltage of the space (no
pulse)
Nominal pulse width
Amplitude ratio of positive and
negative pulses at the pulse center
Width ratio of positive and negative
pulses at the nominal semiamplitude.
A symmetrical
pair
120 W resistive
characteristic
2.37 V
3V
0 0.237 V
0 0.3 V
244ns
0.95~1.05
0.95~1.05
Specifications of the output interface
a. Specifications of input port signal

Digital signals of the input port should comply with the specifications for the pulse
templates shown in Figure 7-22. However, they will change with the pair of wires
connected.
20%
20%
V = 100%
10% 10%
269 ns
(244 + 25)
194 ns
(244 50)
Nominal pulse
50%
10% 10%
219 ns
(244 25)
20%
0%
10% 10%
244 ns
488 ns
(244 + 244)
Figure 7-22 Pulse templates of 2048kbit/s interface
b. Permissible attenuation
140
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
f
Suppose the attenuation of this line pair follows the law of
and the attenuation at
frequency of 1024Hz is in range of 0~6dB. The losses at DDFs between devices should
be included in this attenuation.
c. Reflection loss
Reflection loss of the input port should have the min. value temporarily specified in
Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 Min. value of the reflection loss of input port
Frequency range (kHz)
Reflection loss (dB)
51 -2102
2102 2048
2048 - 3072
12
18
14
d. Anti-jamming capability of input port

No bit error should be generated when one of the following anti-jamming signal is input.
Features of the anti-jamming signal: it has the same nominal frequency and tolerance and
also the same waveform and code as that of the main signal. But they are different in
source. The ratio of the main signal and the jamming signal is 18dB.
4)
Jittering and drift performance

Input jittering and drift tolerance of the digital input port
Input jittering and drift tolerance of 2048kbit/s interface is shown in Figure 7-23.
Features of typical
frame alignment unit
Peak-peak jitter and drift

amplitude (in logarithmic form)
A0
A3
10 times sound interval

with a slope of 20dB
A1
A2
f0
f10 f 9
f8
f1
f2
f3
f4
Jitter frequency (in

logarithmic form)
Figure 7-23 Input jittering and drift tolerance

Tributary mapping jittering
As specified in ITU-T G.703 proposal, tributary interface and mapping jittering of

plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH), and the features of its corresponding
measurement filter are shown in Table 7-12, where the response of the filter should
reduce according to double frequency 20dB/10.

141
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-12 Specification for the generation of mapping jittering

Max. peak to peak jittering
(mapping)
Test filter parameters

ITU-T
G.703 tributary
interface rate
Bit rate
tolerance
f1 high
pass
f3 high pass
f4 low pass
f1-f4
f3-f4
2048kbit/s
50ppm
20Hz~
~20dB/de
c
18kHz
(700Hz)
~20dB/dec
20Hz~20dB/
dec
Not specified
0.075UI
Tributary mapping and pointer adjustment
PDH tributary interface specified in ITU-T G.703 Proposal and its corresponding
combination jittering and measurement filter are listed in Table 7-13.
Table 7-13 Specification for the generation of combination jittering
Test filter parameters
Max. peak to peak jittering
ITU-T
G.703 tributary
interface rate
Bit rate
tolerance
f1 high pass
f3 high pass
f4 low pass
f1-f4
f3-f4
2048kbit/s
50ppm
20Hz~20dB/
dec
18kHz (700Hz)
~20dB/dec
20Hz~20d
B/dec
0.4UI
0.075UI
The test sequence of the representative pointer adjustment is shown in Figure 7-24.
T2
T1
(a) Single pointer with reversed polarity
T3
(b) Regular single pointer plus a dual-pointer
T2
T3
(c) Regular single pointer with one pointer lost
T1
T3
(d) Dual-pointer with reversed polarity
Figure 7-24 Pointer sequence
Requirements for the above parameters are shown in Table 7-14:

Table 7-14 Parameter requirements
For TU pointer
T1 10s
T2 >0.75s
T3 =2ms
For AU pointer
7.2.3 HONET Electromechanical Indexes

I. OLT
Operating voltage (DC): -40V ~ -60V
Rack dimensions:

142
T1 10s
T2 =34ms
T3 =0.5ms
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
B-type rack (including the top cover and side door dimension): 2100mm (H) 880mm
(W) 550 mm (D)
C&C08B rack (excluding the top cover and side door dimension): 1946.5mm (H)
800mm (W) 550 mm (D)
19" rack (including the top cover and side door dimension): 2100mm (H) 680mm (W)
550 mm (D)
19" rack (excluding the top cover and side door dimension): 1946.5mm (H) 600mm (W)
550 mm (D)
Weight of cabinet:
300kg (19" rack)

345kg (C&C08B rack)
Power consumption under full configuration: it is calculated by adding up that of

the stacked frames, and see Section 8.6 "Estimation of Power Consumption" in
this chapter.
Operating environment:
Temperature: 0C ~45C
Humidity: 10% ~90%
Cleanness: dust concentration with its diameter larger than 5m 3 104

particles/m3, the dust particles are not electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive
and corrosive.
Storage condition:
Temperature: 30C ~60C

Humidity: 10% ~90%
Time: no longer than 6 months each time.
II. ONU-512D
The major technical indexes of ONU-512D are as follows:
Operating voltage: -40V ~-60V.

Power supply (AC): 220V 30% (50Hz 10%)
Backup battery power supply (DC): -48V, working at least 8 hours.
Power consumption under full configuration: 603W, including the power
consumption of the heat exchange unit 320W
Rack dimensions: Cabinet dimensions: 1765mm (H) 1605mm (W) 630mm
(D) (The cabinet has no roller and foot)
Weight of cabinet: 500kg (including 4 batteries)
Operating environment: Temperature: -35C ~+45C
Humidity: 5% ~95%
Entry protection level of the cabinet is in compliance with IP5.5 specified in IEC
529.
III. ONU-F01A
Operating voltage (DC): -40V ~-60V
Power consumption of full configuration Power consumption under full
configuration: it is calculated by adding up that of the stacked frames, and see
Section 8.6 "Estimation of Power Consumption" in this chapter.
Cabinet dimensions: 1,800mm(H) 600mm(W) 600mm(D) (including foot
height 92mm)
Weight of cabinet: 405 kg (4 batteries, 1 subscriber frames)
143
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
245 kg (no battery, 3 subscriber frames)

Operating environment: Temperature: -10C ~45C; Humidity: 10%~90%
IV. ONU-F02A
Operating voltage (DC): -40V ~ -60V
Weight of cabinet: 460 kg (4 batteries, 3 subscriber frames)
330 kg (no battery, 5 subscriber frames)
Power consumption of full configuration Power consumption under full

configuration: it is calculated by adding up that of the stacked frames, and see
Section 8.6 "Estimation of Power Consumption" in this chapter.
Cabinet dimensions: 2200mm(H) 600mm(W) 600mm(D) (including the foot
height 92mm)
Operating environment: Temperature: -10C ~+45C; Humidity: 10%~90%
V. ONU-160B
ONU-160B is an outdoor-type ONU developed for users with small capacity. Its
technical specifications are as follows:
Operating voltage (DC): -40V ~-60V

Max. power consumption under full configuration: 100W
Rack dimensions: 800mm (H) 550mm (W) 300mm (D) (The cabinet has no
roller and foot)
Weight of cabinet: 75 kg (main cabinet)
100 kg (extension cabinet, including 4 batteries)
Operating environment: temperature: -20C ~50C; humidity: 5% ~95%

Entry protection level of the cabinet is in compliance with IP5.5 specified in IEC
529.
7.2.4 HONET Clock System

I. HONET synchronization principle and implementation mode
As the access layer of communication network, HONET access network is set up on the
basis of synchronization of digital network, in master /slave synchronization mode. In
normal working mode, the system clock should be synchronous with the clock of superior
service node which usually is LE clock or DDN node machine clock. The system clock
also sends clock information to network or equipment of lower level.
HONET system clock has the following three types:
1)
2)
3)
E1 line clock,
External reference clock,
Local oscillation clock. OLT usually is synchronous with the clock of superior LE
or DDN node machine and ONU is synchronous with OLT clock. When V series
ONU is used, ONU can be synchronous with the clock of superior service node.
OLT clock system uses the digital phase-locked loop with excellent performance. It, in
cooperation with software control, can work in the following four operating modes:
1)
2)
3)
Synchronous with E1 line clock,

Synchronous with 2048kHz or 2048kbit/s external reference clock (such as the
reference clock of BITS or SDH equipment),
Clock hold mode,
144
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
4)
Local oscillation clock mode,
1)
2)
3)
Synchronous with E1 line clock,

Clock hold mode,
Local oscillation clock mode. 8 clock sources of different superiority can be
provisioned for V series ONU: 7 E1 link clock and one local oscillation clock.
The E1 can be either one of the 16 E1s in the system. When the clock source of
higher superiority is lost, the system will shift to the clock source of next
superiority. When all external sources are lost, the system will enter clock hold
mode (24 hours) and then local oscillation clock mode. V series ONU usually
can be synchronous with OLT clock via E1 line, and it can also be synchronous
with LE clock or DDN clock if necessary. V series ONU extension frame clock is
synchronized via main control frame providing differential clock.
Five clock sources of different superiority can be provisioned for OLT: One 2048kbit/s
external reference clock (HDB3 code) in compliance with ITU-T Recommendation
G.703, one 2048kHz external reference clock from BITS system, two E1 line clocks, one
local oscillation clock. When the clock source of higher superiority is lost, the system
will shift to the clock source of next superiority. When all external sources are lost, the
system will enter clock hold mode (24 hours) and then local oscillation clock mode.
Digital phased-locked loop with excellent clock filtering feature can suppress effectively
system clock in the process clock source shifting or when clock source is deteriorated, so
that the stability and reliability of system clock is guaranteed. If OLT is not configured
with clock board, it does not support the access of 2048kbit/s external reference clock.
R series ONU is synchronous with the E1 link connected with OLT via the digital phaselocked loop, thus achieving the synchronization with OLT.
V series ONU uses the synchronization technique similar to OLT. It can work under three
operating modes:
If HONET is to be accessed into LE and DDN node machine simultaneously,

synchronization with LE and DDN is necessary, which is equivalent to HONET phase
locked in LE or DDN. If synchronization with LE and DDN is impossible, Data Access
System (DAS) in HONET access network may be needed for clock problem.
II. Main Indexes of HONET clock system
HONET clock system complies with Stratum-3 clock or Stratum-4 clock of

synchronization network. OLT should be configured with clock board for Stratum-3
clock providing. The jittering and drifting performance follows ITU-T Recommendation
G.823.
1)
HONET Stratum-3 clock indexes are listed in Table 7-15:
Table 7-15 HONET Stratum-3 clock indexes

Item
Index:
Clock working mode

Max frequency deviation
Min. accuracy
Locking range
Initial max. frequency deviation
Secular phase change (MRTIE)
2)
Trace, hold, free-run three mode

<2E-8/day
4.6E-6
>4.6E-6
<1E-8
<30.12ns
HONET Stratum-4 clock indexes are listed in Table 7-16:

145
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-16 HONET Stratum-4 clock indexes

Item
Index:
Clock working mode

Min. accuracy
Locking range
Trace, hold, free-run three mode

20E-6
>50E-6
The access network, located at the access layer in communication network, usually works
in Stratum-4 clock mode.
3)
Bit error performance indexes:
They follow ITU-T Recommendations G.821 and G.826.

7.2.5 HONET System Reliability
I. Reliability mechanism
HONET integrated AN is in modular and dispersed control, and of dual-equipment and

dual network system structure. It not only has flexible networking and can provide
integrated service access to voice, data and image, but also increases the system
reliability significantly.
Such core boards as AV5, PV8, PV4, RSP, PWX and PWC all work in active/standby
mode or load sharing mode. When one is in trouble, another board will take over the
whole frame or the whole system, thus the normal operation of the whole system is
guaranteed.
HONET built-in SDH optical transmission system has the best self-healing protection.
Thus, it improves the reliability of optical transmission system.
II. Main indexes of HONET system reliability
Mean time between failures (MTBF): 12.8 years

Mean time to repair (MTTR): 0.25 hour
System availability (A): 0.999998
System unavailability (U): 2%2-6.
7.3 Indexes of Transmission Technology

Optical transmission equipment used by HONET integrated service AN includes the
built-in SDH, built-in PON-16 passive optical network manufactured by Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd. or the standard optical transmission equipment of other
manufactures.
7.3.1 Technical Indexes of SDH Optical Transmission Equipment
SDH optical transmission equipment of HONET AN mainly includes OptiX155/622H
and OptiX155C. All equipment meet ITU-T Recommendation about SDH and the related
national and industrial standards of the trade.
I. Performance specifications for optical interface
1)
Optical interface parameter specification

Categories of optical interfaces
146
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Possible transmission distance is determined by different optical transmitting power and

receiving sensitivity. The categories of optical interfaces supported by OptiX
transmission equipment are listed in Table 7-17.
Table 7-17 Category Codes of Optical Interfaces
Intra-office
communica
tion
Application
Nominal wavelength of the
optical source (nm)
Types of fibers
STM-1
622080
STM class
STM-4
622080
Inter-office communication
Short
distance
Long distance
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
1550
G0.652
G0.652
G0.652
G0.652
G0.652
G0.652
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
V-4.2
Optical interface parameters
The parameter specifications of different optical interface types are listed respectively in
Table 7-18, Table 7-19, Table 7-20 and Table 7-21. The optical interfaces provided in
OptiX transmission equipment comply with these specifications.
Table 7-18 Parameters Specifications of STM-1 Optical Interface
Item
unit
Values
Nominal bit rate

Category codes
kbit/s
STM-1/155520
S-1.1
L-1.1
Range of operating wavelength
nm
1261-1360
1280-1335
nm
nm
dB
MLM
7.7
-
MLM
3
-
L-1.2
14801580
SLM
1
30
dBm
dBm
dB
dB
ps/nm
-8
-15
8.2
0-12
96
0
-5
10
10-28
246
0
-5
10
10-28
NA
dB
NA
NA
20
dB
NA
NA
-25
dBm
dBm
dB
-28
-8
1
-34
-10
1
-34
-10
1
dB
NA
NA
-25
Transmitter
Optical
channel at
SR point

Receiver
Optical source type

Max. RMS spectral width ()
Max. -20dB spectral width
Min. Side mode suppression ratio
Average transmission power
Max. average transmission power
Min. average transmission power
Min. extinction ratio
Attenuation range
Max. dispersion
Min. RL of fiber cable at S point (including
all removable connectors)
Max. discrete reflection coefficient
between SR points
Min. sensitivity
Min. overload point
Max. cost of optical channel
Max. reflection coefficient of the receiver
at R point
Table 7-19 Parameters Specifications of STM-4 Optical Interface

Item
unit
Nominal bit rate

Category codes
kbit/s
S-4.1
Range of operating wavelength
nm
Values
STM-4/622080
L-4.1
L-4.2
1293-1334/ 1300-1325/
1274-1356
1296-1300

147
V-4.2
1480-1580
14801580
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Item
unit
Optical source type
nm
nm
Max. -20dB spectral width

Min. side mode suppression
dB
Features of
ratio
transmitter at S Average transmission power
point
Max. average transmission
dBm
power
Min. average transmission
dBm
power
Min. extinction ratio
dB
Attenuation range
dB
Max. dispersion
ps/nm
Min. RL of fiber cable at S
Features of
point (including all
dB
optical channel
removable connector)
at SR points
Max. discrete reflection
coefficient between SR
dB
points
Min. sensitivity
dBm
Features of
Min. overload point
dBm
receiver at R
Max. cost of optical channel
dB
point
Max. reflection coefficient of
dB
receiver at R point
2)
Values
MLM
4/2.5
-
MLM
2.0/1.7
-
SLM
<1
SLM
<1
30
30
-8
-15
-3
-3
-3
10
10-24
10
10-31
8.2
0-12
46/74
10
10-24
92/109
NA
20
24
24
NA
-25
-27
-27
-28
-8
1
-28
-8
1
NA
-14
-28
-8
1
-27
-35
-8
1
-27
Average transmission optical power
Average transmission optical power is the measured value at S reference point of pseudorandom data sequence coupled from the transmitter to fiber cable. The indexes of average
transmission optical power of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX transmission
equipment are list in Table 7-20:
Table 7-20 Average transmission optical power

Electrical interface class
Type of optical
interface
Standard
requirement (dBm)
Typical value of
equipment (dBm)
STM-1 622080
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
-15 ~ -8
-5 ~ 0
-5 ~ 0
-11.0
-4.0
-4.0
STM-4 622080
S-4.1
-15 ~ -8
-13.0
L-4.1
L-4.2
V-4.2
-3 ~ +2
-3 ~ +2
-3 ~ +2
0.0
0.0
0.0
3)
Extinction ratio (EX)
EX ratio is the ratio between coded mark average optical power and unallocated mark
average optical power under the condition of worst reflection and full modulation. Table
7-21 lists the EX ratio indexes of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX transmission
equipment.

148
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-21 Extinction ratio (EX)

Electrical interface
class
STM-1 622080
STM-4 622080
4)
Standard requirement
(dB)
Type of optical interface
> 8.2
> 10
> 10
> 8.2
>10
> 10
> 10
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
V-4.2
Typical value of
equipment (dB)
10.5
12
12
10
12
12
12
Receiver sensitivity (BER=1 10-10)
Receiver sensitivity here is the min. average optical power received at R reference point
when the BER is the required value. Table 7-22 lists the receiver sensitivity indexes of
the optical interfaces provided in OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-22 Receiver sensitivity

Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
V-4.2
STM-1 622080
STM-4 622080
5)
(dBm)
< -28
< -34
< -34
< -28
< -28
< -28
< -35
Typical value of
equipment (dBm)
-37
-37
-37
-31
-31
-31
-38.5
Optical overload power of receivers (BER =1 10-10)
Optical overload power of receivers is the max. average optical power received at R
reference point when BER requirement is satisfied. Table 7-23 lists the indexes of optical
overload power of receivers of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX transmission
equipment.
Table 7-23 Optical load power of receivers

STM-1 622080
STM-4 622080
STM-4 622080
6)
Type of optical interface
(dBm)
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
V-4.2
> -8
> -10
> -10
> -8
> -8
> -8
> -18
Permissible frequency deviation of optical input port
Typical value of
equipment (dBm)
-5
-5
-5
>-4
>-4
>-4
-10
Secular frequency stability of oscillator in free-run mode in regenerator should be no

worse than 20 10-6, which can ensure the input interfaces of downstream SDH
equipment work in normal state. Table 7-24 lists the indexes of permissible frequency
deviation of optical input interface of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX
transmission equipment.

149
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-24 Permissible frequency deviation of optical input port

Electrical
interface class
STM-1 622080
STM-4 622080
7)
Type of
optical
interface
20
20
Standard requirement (dBm)
Typical value of equipment

(dBm)
Positive frequency deviation
Negative frequency deviation
+50
+50
-50
-50
AIS rate of optical output port
It refers to the AIS rate sent from the output interface to downstream device in such
faulty cases of SDH input interface as lost signals. Table 7-25 lists the indexes of AIS
rate of optical output interface of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX transmission
equipment.
Table 7-25 AIS rate of optical output port

Typical value of the

equipment (ppm)
Standard requirement (ppm)
STM-1 622080
STM-4 622080
20
20
1
1
II. Specifications of electrical interfaces

1)
Bit rate of output signals
Bit rate of output interface signals refers to the deviation of measured bit rate of output
signal from the nominal bit rate when the output is AIS. Table 7-26 lists the indexes of bit
rate of output signals of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-26 Bit rate of output interface signals

Type of electric interface
1544kbit/s
2048kbit/s
34368kbit/s
44736kbit/s
139264kbit/s
155520kbit/s
2)
Index requirement (ppm)
Typical value (ppm)

3
3
1
1
1
1
50
50
20
20
15
20
Permissible attenuation of input interface
The input interface should receive correctly the attenuated signal caused by connecting
lines (in compliance with f attenuation law). Table 7-27 lists the indexes of permissible
attenuation of input interface of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX transmission
equipment.
Table 7-27 Permissible attenuation of input interface

1544kbit/s
2048kbit/s
34368kbit/s
44736kbit/s
139264kbit/s
155520kbit/s
Index requirement (dB)

No specified
0~6
0 ~ 12
No specified
0 ~ 12
0 ~ 12.7

150
Typical value (dB)

0~6
0~6
0 ~ 12
0 ~ 12
0 ~ 12
0 ~ 12.7
Technical Manual
3)
Table of Contents
Permissible frequency deviation of input interface
Permissible frequency deviation of input interface is the max. permissible bit rate
deviation of input signal at digital input interface. Table 7-28 lists the indexes of
permissible frequency deviation of input interface of the optical interfaces provided in
OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-28 Permissible frequency deviation of input interface
Positive frequency
deviation
+100
+100
+30
+30
+80
+100
50
50
20
20
15
20
1544kbit/s
2048kbit/s
34368kbit/s
44736kbit/s
139264kbit/s
155520kbit/s
4)
Typical value (ppm)
Index requirement (ppm)
Negative frequency
deviation
-100
-100
-35
-35
-80
-100
Anti-jamming capability of input interface
Anti-jamming capability is required for input interface for the transmission cable is
subject to space electromagnetic interference. Table 7-29 lists the indexes of antijamming capability of input interface of the optical interfaces provided in OptiX
Table 7-29 Anti-jamming capability of input interface

2048kbit/s
Index requirement
Typical values
Meet the requirement of the indexes
18dB
III. Clock timing and synchronization Indexes

1)
Output jittering
Output jittering is the jittering output value when the equipment has no input jittering.
Table 7-30 lists the output jittering indexes.
Table 7-30 Output jittering
Clock interface
1
2
2)
Requirement of output jittering (UI pp)

0.05
0.05
Typical value of output jittering (UI pp)

0.01
0.01
Accuracy of output frequency of the internal oscillator in free-run mode
Output frequency index refers to output frequency accuracy of internal clock in free-run
mode. Table 7-31 lists the indexes of accuracy of output frequency of the internal
oscillator in OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-31 Clock output frequency
Clock
interface
1
Index
requirement
(ppm)
4.6
Typical value of output frequency deviation (ppm)

0 hours
0.120
4
Max.
8 hours 12 hours 16 hours 20 hours 24 hours
hours
value
0.120
0.125
0.130

151
0.125
0.130
0.130
0.130
Technical Manual
4.6
3)
Table of Contents
0.120
0.120
0.125
0.130
0.125
0.130
0.130
0.130
Secular phase change (in lock-in mode)
Secular phase change refers to the slow output signal deviation of the active reference
clock due to temperature, aging etc. It is often expressed by Maximum Time Interval
Error (MTIE) and Timing Deviation (TDEV). Table 7-32 and Table 7-33 list the indexes
of secular phase change of OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-32 Secular phase change (MTIE)
100s
Clock
interface
MTIE
1
2
300s
Index
requirement
Typical
values
63.39ns
63.39ns
30.12ns
30.22ns
600s
Index
Typical
requiremen
values
t
79.01ns 33.54ns
79.01ns 33.56ns
1000s
Index
Typical
requiremen
values
t
90.76ns 44.78ns
90.76ns 44.75ns
Index
Typical
requiremen
values
t
100.52ns 50.33ns
100.52ns 50.32ns
Table 7-33 Secular phase change (TDEV)

100s
Clock
interface
Typical
TDEV Index requirement values
1
2
6.4ns
6.4ns
3.2ns
3.1ns
300s
600s
Index
Typical
requiremen
values
t
6.4ns
2.9ns
6.4ns
2.9ns
1000s
Index
Typical
requiremen
values
t
6.4ns
3.0ns
6.4ns
2.9ns
Index
Typical
requiremen
values
t
6.4ns
2.9
6.4ns
2.8
IV. Jittering performance indexes

1)
Output jittering of STM-N interface of SDH equipment
It refers to the natural jittering at STM-N output optical interface when the measure time
of no input jittering at synchronized interface exceeds 60s. Table 7-34 lists the indexes of
output jittering of STM-N interface in OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-34 Jittering of STM-N output interface

Electrical
interface
class
STM-1 622080
STM-4 622080
2)
Output jittering of optical interface (UIpp)

Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
V-4.2
B1 (f1~f4)
Standard
requirement
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
B2 (f3~f4)
Typical values
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.080
0.080
0.080
0.080
Standard
requirement
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
Jittering and drift tolerances of STM-N input equipment of SDH
Typical
values
0.060
0.060
0.060
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.070
It refers to the acceptable input jittering of SDH terminal and regenerator which does not
deteriorate the performance. Table 7-35 and Table 7-36 list the indexes of input jittering
tolerance of STM-N interface in OptiX transmission equipment.

152
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-35 Input jittering tolerance of STM-N input interface

Jittering tolerance
STM class
STM-1
622080
STM-4
622080
Jittering frequency f1
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
Measured
value (UI)
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
Measured
value (UI)
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
Measure
d value
(UI)
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
Measured
value (UI)
1.5
10
1.5
10
0.15
0.15
1.2
1.5
10
1.5
10
0.15
2.3
0.15
1.3
Table 7-36 Frequency of jittering measurement filter

STM class
STM-1 622080
STM-4 622080
3)
f1 (Hz)
f2 (kHz)
500
1000
f3 (kHz)
6.5
25
65
250
f4 (MHz)
1.3
5
Input jittering and drift tolerance of PDH tributary interface
It refers to the acceptable input jittering of PDH terminal and regenerator which does not
deteriorate the performance. Table 7-37 and Table 7-38 list the indexes of input jittering
tolerance of PDH tributary interface in OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-37 Input jittering tolerance of PDH tributary interface
Jittering tolerance
kbit/s
2048
34368
139264
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
Measured
value (UI)
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
Measured
value (UI)
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
Measure
d value
(UI)
Index
requireme
nt (UI)
1.5
1.5
1.5
10
10
10
1.5
1.5
1.5
10
10
10
0.2
0.15
0.07
2.5
2.6
2.4
0.2
0.15
0.07
Measured
value (UI)
1.7
1.5
1.4
Table 7-38 Frequency of jittering measurement filter

Tributary rate (kbit/s)
2048
34368
139264
4)
f1 (Hz)
f2 (kHz)
20
100
200
2.4
1
0.5
Mapping jittering of PDH tributary interface
f3 (kHz)
18
10
10
f4 (kHz)
100
800
3500
It refers to the jittering caused by such mechanism as asynchronous mapping

justification. Table 7-39 lists the indexes of mapping jittering of PDH tributary interface
in OptiX transmission equipment.

153
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-39 Mapping jittering of PDH tributary interface

Mapping jittering (UIp-p)
Type of electric
interface
B1 (f1~f4)
Standard
requirement
1544kbit/s
2048kbit/s
34368kbit/s
44736kbit/s
139264kbit/s
5)
B2 (f3~f4)
Standard
requirement
Typical values
In study
In study
0.4
In study
0.4
0.065
0.065
0.070
0.080
0.090
Typical values
In study
0.075
0.075
In study
0.075
0.030
0.030
0.025
0.025
0.050
Combined jittering of PDH tributary interface
It refers to the combined jittering of PDH tributary interface caused by pointer

justification. Table 7-40 and Table 7-41lists the indexes of combined jittering of PDH
tributary interface in OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-40 Combined jittering of PDH tributary interface
Type of
electrical
interface
1544kbit/s
2048kbit/s
34368kbit/s
44736kbit/s
139264kbit/s
Single pointer with reversed polarity (UIpp)

B1
Standard
requirement
1.5
0.4
0.4
In study
0.4
B2
Standard
requirement
In study
0.075
0.075
In study
0.075
Typical
values
0.090
0.090
0.070
0.070
0.100
Typical
values
0.040
0.040
0.035
0.030
0.030
Adding of regular pointer (UIpp)

B1
Standard
requirement
1.5
0.4
0.4
In study
0.4
Typical
values
0.100
0.100
0.085
0.085
0.110
B2
Standard
requirement
In study
0.075
0.075
In study
0.075
Typical
values
0.045
0.045
0.030
0.030
0.040
Table 7-41 Combined jittering of PDH tributary interface

Pinter of Regular loss (UIpp)
Type of
electrical
interface
1544kbit/s
2048kbit/s
34368kbit/s
44736kbit/s
139264kbit/s
B1
Standard
requirement
1.5
0.4
0.4
In study
0.4
Dual-pointers with reversed polarity (UIpp)
B2
Typical
values
0.095
0.095
0.080
0.080
0.105
B1
B2
Standard
requirement
Typical
values
Standard
requirement
Typical
values
Standard
requirement
Typical
values
In study
0.075
0.075
In study
0.075
0.045
0.045
0.040
0.040
0.040
1.5
0.4
0.4
In study
0.4
0.095
0.090
0.085
0.085
0.110
In study
0.075
0.075
In study
0.075
0.040
0.040
0.035
0.035
0.045
V. Test Indexes of EMC
OptiX transmission equipment is designed according to ETS300 386 series and ETS
300127 by ETSI and is qualified in related EMC test. Table 7-42 lists the indexes of
related EMC test for OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-42 EMC test result

Items
Test standard
Conducted emission
Radiated emission
EN55022 Class A
EN55022 Class A
154
Test result
pass
pass
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
IEC1000-4-2 (Air Discharge:8kV;

Contact Discharge:6kV)
IEC1000-4-3 (10V/m)
Electrostatic discharge
Immunity to radiated electromagnetic fields
Electrical Transient/Burst ImmunityQuick electrical
transient/pulse string
(Electrical Transient/Burst Immunity)
Inject Current ImmunityConductive sensitivity
pass
pass
IEC1000-4-4 (2kV)
pass
IEC1000-4-6 (3V)
pass
VI. Environment test
Under environment stress, the environment adaptability of the optical transmission

system of OptiX transmission equipment is verified.
Here environment stress refers to continuous working for 24 hours in high temperature of
+45C and continuous working for 24 hours in low temperature of 0C.
Table 7-43 lists the environment test for OptiX transmission equipment.
Table 7-43 Environment test results of OptiX transmission equipment system at high and low
temperatures
Test result
Index
requirement
Item
Optical receiving sensitivity

Average optical power
L-1.1
S-4.1
L-1.1
S-4.1
Clock frequency
Bit errors within 24 hours
2M
34M
45M
155M (electrical)
155M
622M
<-34 dBm
<-28dBm
0~-5 dBm
-15~-8 dBm
4.6ppm
No
No
No
No
No
No
Low temperature
0C
-37.6
-31.6
-4.3
-8
-0.89ppm
No
No
No
No
No
No
High
temperature
+45C
-37.8
-31.8
-4
-8.5
-0.64ppm
No
No
No
No
No
No
VII. Vibration test
The vibration adaptability of OptiX transmission equipment is verified through the

vibration test.
According to GB/T13543-92 Environment test method of digital communication
equipment, sinusoid scanning vibration test of 10~200Hz is made for the equipment for
30 minutes. The scanning rate is 1 Oct/min, and in X, Y, Z axes. The acceleration is 2g.
The equipment structure of OptiX transmission equipment is not distorted after the
vibration test. All boards are well secured. Table 7-44 lists the vibration test for OptiX

155
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-44 Vibration test results

Test result
Index
requirement
Item
Optical receiving
sensitivity
Clock frequency
Bit errors within 24
hours
Bit errors within 24
hours
X vibration
direction
Y vibration
direction
Z vibration
direction
L-1.1
<-34 dBm
-38.5
-38.4
-38.4
S-4.1
<-28dBm
-31.9
-32.1
-31.8
L-1.1
S-4.1
0~-5 dBm
-15~-8 dBm
-3.5
-8.5
-3.6
-8.6
-3.5
-8.5
4.6 ppm
-0.58ppm
-0.57ppm
-5.8ppm
2M
34M
45M
155 (electrical)
155M
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
622M
No
No
No
No
VIII. Transmission distance of optical interface
OptiX transmission equipment provides the following G.652 fiber-based standard

interfaces. Their transmission distance is as shown in Table 7-45.
Suggestion: in the actual application, if the transmission distance should be larger than
the typical value, it is recommended to use an optical module of 1 level higher. For
example, when transmitting 40km (>30km) 155Mb rate, it is recommended to use a
50km module.
Table 7-45 Optical interface transmission distance of OptiX transmission equipment
Rate
STM-1
622080
STM-4
622080
Type of
optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
V-4.2
Transmission power
(dB)
Min
.
Typical
-11
-4
-4
-13
0
0
0
Min.
Receiving sensitivity (dB)
Transmission distance
(km)
Min.
Min.
Typical
-37
-37
-37
-31
-31
-31
-38.5

Min.
0
10
20
0
20
35
35
Typical
Remark
Min.
30
50
90
30
50
80
120
Note:
Transmission distance in the Table is only used as a reference. Since the combined effects of the fiber
quality, number of fusion nodes, the loss of fusion and loss of removable connectors of the engineering
cables, the actual transmission distance may be a little different with the above values.
The two influencing factors for transmission distance are loss and dispersion. For G.652
optical fiber, only the restricted distance due to loss is considered since the 1310nm
working wavelength window is zero-dispersion (dispersion coefficient is less than
3.5ps/nm.km). 1550nm working wavelength window has a dispersion coefficient of
156
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
18ps/nm.km, so the restricted distance due to both loss and dispersion will be considered,
with the smaller as the transmission distance.
The restricted distance due to loss should be calculated with the following formula:
Trans. Optical Power-Rec. Sensitivity-Engineering Margin
Fiber Loss Every Kilometer
Attached formula 5-1

Generally, the engineering margin is 5~8dB. 0.4dB/km is used as the loss of the fiber in
every kilometer in 1310nm window and 0.25dB/km in 1550nm window.
The restricted distance due to dispersion can be calculated with the following formula:
Max. Dispersion of Optical Trans. Source
Fiber Dispersion Coefficient

According to G.957 proposal, the max. dispersion of the optical transmitting source is
calculated with the following formula:
D max
eX10
Bit Rate(Mb/s)XSqu. Spectral Width(nm)

For Single-Longitudinal-Mode (SLM) laser, is 0.306, which is equivalent to 1dB
optical channel penalty; for L-16.2, is 0.491, which is equivalent to 2dB optical channel
penalty; for Multi-Longitudinal-Mode (MLM) laser, is 0.115. For SLM laser, rootmean square spectral width is 1/6.07 of 20dB spectral width.
The above-mentioned optical interfaces refer to the standard optical interfaces in
compliance with ITU-T Recommendations G.957 and G.scs. For those other than these
optical interfaces, there is still no recommendation by ITU-T. The transmission distance
can be expanded via optical fiber amplifier.
IX. Environment conditions
Requirements for environment condition of OptiX transmission equipment are shown in

Table 7-46.
Table 7-46 Environment conditions
Environment conditions
Item
Operating range to guarantee the performance
Operating range
Transinterfaceation and storage
Temperature
0 OC ~ 40 OC
-5 OC ~ 45 OC
-25 OC ~ 70 OC
Humidity
20 ~ 90%
10 ~ 95%
95%
7.3.2 Technical Indexes of HONET-PON16 Optical Transmission Equipment

I. System technical indexes
System capacity: the max. transmission capacity is 16 2Ms.
Max. optical splitting ratio is 1:16.
Max. level of optical splitting: >3

157
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Note:
Max. levels of optical splitting of PON16 system have no limit in principle. It is only related with the
specific networking mode and optical power distribution.
System transmission distance: Max. 50km for point to point system
Max. 30km for point to multi-points system
-10
System transmission bit errors: BER < 10
II. Technical indexes of PON16-C
Near-end equipment PON16-C is a near-end optical interface, including electric/optical

conversion module, data multiplexing/demultiplexing module and tributary processing
module. PON16-C provides a pair of optical receiving/transmitting interfaces connected
with ODN and provides standard E1 interface at the service end.
1)
Technical indexes of fiber interface
Technical indexes of fiber interface are as shown in Table 7-47.

Table 7-47 Technical indexes of fiber interface
Technical indexes of
fiber interface
Technical parameters of fiber interface

Max. distance difference between ONUs
Optical transmitting device
Operating wavelength
Burst optical receiver
Receiving sensitivity
Saturated receiving
Burst optical receiver
optical power
Connecting mode
Optical connector
Reflection loss
2)
unit
30
-8~+2
13104
-30
km
dBm
nm
dBm
-10
dBm
1260~1580
FC/PC
>40
nm
dB
Operating technical indexes of PON16-C
Operating technical indexes of PON16-C are shown in Table 7-48.

Table 7-48 Operating technical indexes
Operating technical parameters
Operating technical indexes
Operating voltage
DC -40 ~ -60
Installation mode
In HONET cabinet (office OLT rack or remote ONU cabinet)
Power consumption of full

configuration
Operating
environment
Temperature
Humidity
unit
V
15
-5~55
OC
20% ~ 80%
III. PON16-R-PAT technical specifications
Remote equipment PON16-R PAT refers to remote optical interface unit, including O/E
converter module, data multiplexing /demultiplexing module and tributary processing

158
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
module. PON16-R PAT provides standard E1 interfaces for subscriber side and one pair
of optical transmitting /receiving interface connected with ODN.
1)
Technical indexes of fiber interface
Technical indexes of fiber interface are as shown in Table 7-49.

Table 7-49 Technical indexes of fiber interface
Technical indexes of fiber
interface
Technical parameters of fiber interface

Max. transmission distance of ONU
Optical transmitter in burst mode
Continuous optical receiver
Optical connector
2)
unit
50

Receiving sensitivity
Saturated receiving optical
power
Connecting mode
Reflection loss
km
-8~+2
13104
-38
dBm
nm
dBm
-5
dBm
1260~1580
FC/PC
>40
nm
dB
PON16-R/PAT operating technical indexes
PON16-R/PAT operating technical indexes are shown in Table 7-50.

Table 7-50 Operating technical indexes
Operating technical parameters
Operating voltage
DC -40 ~-60
Installation mode
In the remote ONU cabinet of HONET access network
Power consumption of full configuration

(16E1)
Power consumption of Min. configuration
(4E1)
Operating environment
3)
Operating technical indexes
Temperature
Humidity
unit
V
12
10
-5~55
OC
20% ~ 80%
Performance indexes of system electrical interface
Refer to the specification indexes of SDH 2048kbit/s electric interface in section 8.3.1.
IV. Technical indexes of optical distribution network
Generally, optical distribution network (ODN) provides optical transmission medium for
PON16-C and PON16-R/PAT as the physical connection. Meanwhile, a fiber amplifier
can be used to prolong the transmission distance and increase the number of users it can
serve. But, for the end network--AN, the cost would be too high if a fiber amplifier is
used.
ODN is a passive optical distribution network formed by passive optical devices. The
main passive devices include:
Single mode fiber and optical cable
Optical connector
Passive splitting device, also called optical divider (OBD)
Passive optical attenuator
Fiber joint
159
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
ODN is normally configured in a point to multi-point mode. That is to say, multiple

remote PON16-R/PATs are connected with a near-end PON16-C of ODN. In this way,
multiple PON16-R/PATs can share a transmission medium and optical/electrical device,
thus reducing the cost of network.
During ODN design, it should guarantee that all services that can be foreseen at present
can be provided without much modification. This requirement has greater effects on
various passive optical devices. To be specific, factors that can directly affect the optical
features of ODN include: Specifically, the factors which may have direct impact on ODN
optical features include:
1)
Transparency of the optical wavelength: Passive devices used in passive

optical network can supinterface signal transmission of any wavelength in
1310nm and 1550nm wavelength windows. This will not only reduce the
requirements for the optical source of the present single wavelength system,
but also lays a foundation for the future upgrade of WDM system.
Reversibility: After the exchange of input/output interfaces of ODN, it should not
cause significant change of the device parameters such as optical loss. In this
way, the design of the network can be simplified.
Compatibility: Fiber compatibility: Because G.652 fiber is the only fiber applied
in the AN, all units should be compatible with G.652 fiber.
Reflection requirement of ODN
2)
Basic technical indexes of major passive optical devices
Reflection requirement of ODN depends on the RL of various elements of ODN and any
transmission point of optical channel. During the operation of the system, the discrete
reflection should be better than -35dB and the max. discrete reflection of the fiber joint
should be better than -50dB.
Technical indexes of the optical divider are shown in Table 7-51.
Table 7-51 Technical indexes of the optical divider (1n interface)
Parameters
Loss of insertion (dB)
Max. value
Min. Value
4.0Log2N
Reflection coefficient (dB)
-40
Operating wavelength (nm)
1360/1580
1260/1480
0.1 (1+Log2N)
1.0Log2N
50
Loss of polarization (.dB)

Uniformity (dB)
Directivity coefficient (dB)
Note:
In the system application, both symmetric and asymmetric optical dividers can be used. The above
calculation is based on the symmetrical optical divider.
Technical indexes of the optical attenuator are shown in Table 7-52.

160
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-52 Technical indexes of optical attenuator

Parameters
Max. value
Min. Value
Nominal value
+15%
-15%
3,5,7,9,11,13,15,20
-40
1360/1580
1260/1480
Tolerance of insertion loss

Insertion loss (fixed attenuation) (dB)
1310/1550
0.3
Basic technical indexes of the optical connector are shown in Table 7-53.
Table 7-53 Technical indexes of the optical connector
Parameters
Max. value
Min. Value
0.5 (single mode fiber)
-35
1360/1580
1260/1480
0.1
Technical indexes of the fiber joint are shown in Table 7-54.

Table 7-54 Indexes of fiber joint
Parameters
Max. value
Min. Value
-
Mechanical joint
0.5
Active calibrated fusion joint
0.3
Passive calibrated fusion joint
0.5
Optical reflection coefficient (dB)

Mechanical joint
-40
Fusion joint
-70
3)
1360/1580
Fiber Indexes
1260/1480
Transmission distance used in the AN system is shorter, the requirement for bandwidth is
not strict, but the requirements for the cost is strict. It is stipulated in the standards of AN
to use 1310nm single-mode fiber with the optimum performance i.e. the standard G.652
fiber. Multimode fiber or other single mode fiber should not be used, as shown in Table
7-55.

161
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table 7-55 Basic indexes of fiber

Technical
specifications
Technical parameters
Diameter of mode field
Nominal value
Permissible deviation
Diameter of cladding
4)
8.6-9.5
unit
um
10%
1252
um
Loss of bent
0.5
dB
Attenuation constant
0.5
dB/km
Max. dispersion coefficient
1228-1339 Wavelength
area
3.5
ps/ (nm.km)
Max. Zero-dispersion
coefficient
1300-1324 Wavelength
area
0.09
ps/(nm.km)
Cut-off Wavelength
2m fiber
2-20m fiber
20m fiber
1250
1260
1260
nm
nm
Reserved margin indexes of optical distribution network
In PON16 networking, it is required to estimate optical power loss for every optical
channel of optical distribution network according to the transmission distance. In the
estimation, margins should be reserved for optical power loss of different transmission
distances. The detailed values are listed in Table 7-56.
Table 7-56 Indexes for reserved margin of fiber loss
Transmission distance of the fiber (km)
Estimated surplus of fiber loss (dB)

1
2
3
5
>5 and 10
10
7.3.3 Transmission Indexes for Board-Embedded APDH Optical

Transmission Equipment
Line code type: NRZ scrambling
Transmission rate: 67.584Mbit/s
Operating wavelength: 1310nm
Fiber type: single mode
Fiber connector: SC/PC, FC/PC
Average transmitting optical power: -14dBm (-4dBm)
Receiving sensitivity: 34dBm
Dynamic range of receiving optical power: 20dB 30dB)
Max. transmission distance:30km (50km)
Refer to the specification indexes of SDH 2048kbit/s electric interface in section
8.3.1. for electric interface specifications.
Note:
The values in the bracket are the parameters for long-haul optical devices. FIU, TIU and BIU all can
use long-haul optical devices, with no change of boards.

162
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
7.3.4 Transmission Indexes of CATV Module

CATV module performs the receiving and transmitting of CATV signals. It converts the
electrical signal into optical signal at OLT end with optical transmitter and recover the
optical signal into electrical at ONU. Its technical indexes are as follows: Its main
technical indexes are as follows:
Carrier/noise ratio: C/N>51dB

2nd order beat: CSO<-61dBc
rd
3 order beat: CTB<-65dBc
Bandwidth: 45~750MHz (59 analog channels in 45550MHz. Digital channels
in the range of 550~750MHz. 200 MPEG-2 digital television signals can be
transmitted in 64QAM.)
Input level of the optical transmitter: 15dBmv/ch
Output level of the optical receiver: 35dBmv/ch
RF input/output impedance: 75
Output optical power: 4mW, 6mW, 8mW, 10mW, 12mW, 14mW, 16mW, and
20mW, selectable.
Operating wavelength: 1310nm/1550nm
Fiber type: single mode
Optical connector: SC/APC
Max. transmission distance: 30km
Operating voltage: DC: -40V~-60V
O
O
Operating environment: 0 C ~50 C
7.4 Protection Measures and Performance

7.4.1 Protection Index of Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
MDF is the first-level protection and the interfaces of switching equipment are the
second-level protection. Over-voltage protection and over-current protection of
subscriber lines and trunk lines comply with ITU-T Recommendation K.20; electric
power induction test and power line contact test satisfy the requirements. The system can
recover automatically after testing impact.
Exposed environment: 4000V, 10us/1000s
Non-exposed environment: 1000V, 10us/1000s
Electric power induction test: Max testing voltage is 600V and the testing
duration is 1s.
Power line contact: 220V, no flame for 15 minutes
7.4.2 Protection Indexes of Lightning Protection Box

Lightning protection box is designed in reference to such standards by IEC as IEC-60664,
IEC-61312 and IEC-61643, which is used as the second-level protection for the AC
power supply of access network and the protection index is 20kA (8/20us). The lightning
box also has over-current protection and alarm circuit inside and state indicator on the
front panel.

163
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
7.5 Ground Requirements

Ground of HONET is designed in the principle of the constant voltage and equalpotential i.e. a combined grounding body is shared by the working ground and the
protection ground (including shielding ground and lightning protection ground of the
main distribution frame).
The grounding resistance of OLT, various ONUs, maintenance workstation, network
equipment and remote access adapter should not be more than 5 .
7.6 Estimation of Power Consumption

Most of the power is consumed on the subscriber board: there is feeding current in the
subscriber line when it is put through (which is equivalent to dynamic power
consumption) and fundamental current in the line when it is hung up (which is equivalent
to static power consumption). In general, the dynamic power consumption of a speech
channel is 1.25W and the static power consumption is 0.25W. Suppose there is a switch
with M subscribers, approximate convergence ratio is 1:N and full power consumption X,
then:
X=0.25 (1-1/N) M +1.25 1/N M (W)
For example, for ONU-F02A configured with 324 subscribers, the approximate line
concentration ratio is 1: 4, and the power consumption of its subscriber frame is about:
X=0.25 (1-0.25) 624 +1.25 0.25 624=312 (W)
Because the power consumption of the optical transmission system is 25W, the system
power consumption is:
312+25=337 (W)
The above is the estimation method for power consumption.
Table 7-57 lists the typical power consumption of some frames under general condition
(for reference only):
Table 7-57 Estimations of typical power consumption of some frames (Unit:W)
Static power
consumption
Frame name
GV5-III Main Control Frame
PV8-12 Main control frame (HFB backplane, ONU--F01A, ONU-F02)
PV8-10 Main control frame (HGB backplane, ONU-F01, ONU-F02)
PV8-10 Main control frame (HGB backplane, 32-channel subscriber
board, ONU-F01, ONU-F02)
RSP-12 (HFB backplane, ONU-1000, ONU-512)
RSP-14 (HIB backplane, ONU-F01, ONUF-02)
RSP-14 (HIB backplane, 32-channel subscriber board ONU-F01, ONUF02)
OptiX155/622H standard configuration (1OI2D and 1SP1D)
OptiX155/622H full configuration (3 OI2Ds and 1PD2T)
BAM
CATV Module optical receiver
CATV module optical transmitter
CATV module power supply
Fan frame (4 fans)
48
50
73
110
104
139
232
36
28
98
92
138
256

164
Dynamic power
consumption
49
82
56
15
25
20
20
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Note:
For subscriber frame and PV8 main control frame, the test standard for static power consumption is
that all subscribers are on-hook and the test standard for dynamic power consumption is 1/4 of the
subsscribers are off-hook. Without specification, all subscriber frames and PV8 main control frames
adopt 16-CH subscriber board test.
7.7 Indexes of ETS450WLL Wireless Access System

7.7.1 Frequency Range
Uplink frequency range: 450.5~453.5 MHz
Downlink frequency range: 460.5~463.5 MHz
Uplink/downlink frequency interval: 10MHz
7.7.2 Coverage Area

It can reach 2050km according to different geographical and natural environment.
7.7.3 Traffic and Subscriber Capacity
When it is 0.03Erl/subscriber, each channel accommodates 20 subscribers.
When it is 0.08Erl/subscriber, each channel accommodates 10 subscribers.
A single SIPP module can have 4800 subscribers in maximum.
A single SIPP module can supinterface 16 base stations in maximum.
Each base station system has 29 channels in maximum.
Each base station system supinterfaces 768 wireless subscribers in maximum.
7.8 Indexes of ETS1900 Wireless Access System

7.8.1 Frequency Range
Operating frequency:
equipment).
1880-1900MHz
(for
European
frequency
point
1900-1920MHz (for Chinese frequency point equipment).

Number of carriers: 10
Frequency interval: 1.728MHz
Width of active frequency: 1.152MHz
Central frequency stability: 25ppm
Modulation mode: GFSK
7.8.2 Coverage Area

When an Omni-directional antenna is used, the coverage area is 30~50m
indoor, and 300~500m outdoor.
When a high-gain directional antenna is used, the max. coverage range is
15km, and the radiation scope is 60.

165
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
7.8.3 Traffic and Subscriber Capacity

When networking based on SIPP, first select the number of E1 interfaces at OLT and LE
and the number of E1 interfaces at ONU according to the total number of system
subscribers and the traffic to determine OLT configuration. Then, select ONU type and
configuration for an area according to the number of subscribers, traffic requirements and
subscriber distribution in the area. The networking of transmission for a system depends
on the distribution of ONUs and the selection of the transmission network. For the
reference of SIPP networking, Table 7-58 lists the resource quantities of R series ONU in
full configuration:
Table 7-58 Comparison of the capacity of R series ONUs in full configuration
ONU Model
ONU-512
Number of E1
4
Number of base station

64
Number of air channel

384

166
Number of wireless
subscribers (1:12)
1440
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Appendix A Abbreviations........................................................................................................... 168

167
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 8 Abbreviations
A
ADM
ADSL
AIS
AN
AN-NMS
ANSI
ASL
ATI
ATM
AU
AV5
B
BAM
BCC
BHCA
BITS
BIU
BRA
BRI
BS
BSC
C
CATV
CCITT
CDI
CDMA
CF
CID
CLIP
CPE
CPN
CRC
CTB
CTC
D
DAS
DCE
DCM
DCN
DDI
DDN
DDU
DECT
DMT
DSL
DSP
DTE (1)
DTE (2)
DTMF
E
EIA
EIU
EM
EMC
Add and Drop Multiplexer

Asymmetric Digital Subscriber line
Alarm Indication Signal
Access Network
Access Network-Network Management System
American National Standards Institute
Analog Subscriber Line Board
Analog Trunk Interface
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Administration Unit
Access V5 board
Back Administration Module
B-channel Connect Control
BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts)
Building Integrated Timing Supply System
Branch Interface Unit
Basic Rate Access
Basic Rate Interface
Base Station
Base Station Controller
Cable Television
Consultative Committee of International Telegraph and Telephone
Compatible Direct Dial-In
Code Division Multiple Access
Core Function
Caller Identification Display
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Customer Premises Equipment
Customer Premises Network
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Carrier to Composite Triple Beat Ratio
Computer of Test and Communication
DAS
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
Digital Communication Multiplex
Data Communication Network
Direct Dial-In
Digital Data Network
Date Interface Unit
Digital European Cordless Telephone
Discrete Multi-Tone
Digital Subscriber Line Board
Digital Signal Processing Board
Digital Terminal Equipment
Digital Trunk Equipment
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
Electronic Industries Association
E1 Interface Unit
Execution Module
Electro Magnetic Compatibility
168
Technical Manual
ESC
ETS
ETSI
F
FCC
FCP
FDMA
FR
FSM
FTTB
FTTC
FTTH
FTTV
FTTZ
FXO
FXS
G
H
HDB3
HDLC
HDTV
HDSL
HFC
HGRP
HONET
HSL
HW
I
IEC
IEEE
IP
ISDN
ISO
ISP
ITU-T
J
K
L
LAN
LAP
LAPD
LE
LL
LMDS
M
MAC
MCP
MDF
MML
MSK
MST(1)
MST(2)
MSU
MTA
MTBF
MTIE
MTTR
N
NAT
NCP
N-ISDN
Table of Contents
Environment Supervision Circuit

European Telecommunication Standards
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
Federal Communications Commission
Far Control Processor
Frequency Division Multiple Access
Frame Relay
Finite State Machine
Fiber To The Building
Fiber To The Curb
Fiber To The Home
Fiber To The Village
Fiber To The Zone
Foreign Exchange Office
Foreign Exchange Subscriber
High Density Bipolar of order 3 code

High Level Data Link Control procedure
High Definition Television
High-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line
Hybrid Fiber Coaxial
Huawei General Remote Subscriber Processing
Home Optical Network
High Speed Line Interface
Highway
International Electrotechnical Commission
Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
Internet Protocol
Integrated Services Digital Network
International Standardization Organization
Internet Service Provider
International Telecommunication Union -Telecommunication Sector
Local Area Network

Link Access Protocol
Link Access Procedure-D channel
Local Exchange
Leased Line
Local Multipoint Distribute System
Media Access Control
Multiple Communication-Protocol Processor
Main Distribution Frame
Man-Machine Language
Minimum Shift-frequency Keying
Multiplex Section Terminal
Magnetic Signal Transformation
Multi-Subscriber Unit
Multi-Terminal Adaptation
Mean Time Between failure
Maximum Time Interval Error
Mean Time To Repair
National Agreement Entity
Network Control Point
Narrow-band Integrated Services Digital Network
169
Technical Manual
NMS
O
ODN
OHA
OLT
OMC
ONU
OOP
OptiX
OptiXMN
OS
OSI
P
PBX
PCM
PDH
PON
POTS
PRA
PRI
PSPDN
PSTN
PV4
PV8
PWC
PWX
Q
R
RAS
RSA
RSP
S
SCS
SDH
SIPP
SNI
SN
Table of Contents
Network Management System

Optical Distribution Network
Overhead Access
Optical Line Terminal
Operation & Maintenance Center
Optical Network Unit
Object-Oriented Programming
Synchronous Backbone System
OptiX Management Network
Operating System
Open System Interconnection
Private Branch Exchange
Pulse Code Modulation
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Passive Optical Network
Plain Ordinary Telephone Service
Primary Rate Access
Primary Rate Interface
Packet Switched Public Digital Network
Public Switched Telephone Network
Protocol Processing of V5 (4E1)
Protocol Processing of V5 (8E1)
Power Control Board
Power Control Board
Remote Access Server

Remote Subscriber Area
Remote Subscriber Processing
Sub-rate Concentrating Switch
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Service Interface and Protocol Processing
Service Node Interface
Service Node
SRX
Sub-Rate Multiplexer
STE
Signal Transfer Equipment
STM
T
TA
TCP/IP
TDM
TDMA
TE
TF
TIM
TIU
TM
TXD
TMN
TSS
U
UNI
UPF
V
VC
VFB
Synchronous Transfer Mode

Terminal Adaptation
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
Time Division Multiplex
Time Division Multiple Access
Terminal Equipment
Transfer Function
Trace Identifier Mismatch
Optical Terminal Interface Unit
Terminal Multiplexer
Transmitting Date
Telecommunications Management Network
Test of Subscriber Line
User Network Interface
User Port Function
Virtual Container
Voice Frequency Board
170
Technical Manual
VOD
VPDN
VPN
W
WAN
WDM
WLL
WS
WSA
X
Y
Z
Table of Contents
Video On Demand
Virtual Private Data Network
Virtual Private Network
Wide Area Network
Wave Division Multiplexer
Wireless Local Loop
Workstation Server
Wireless Service Access

171
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Appendix B Glossary ................................................................................................................... 174
B.1 112 Test............................................................................................................................ 174
B.2 A ....................................................................................................................................... 174
B.2.1 AN: Access Network .............................................................................................. 174
B.2.2 An: Access Node ................................................................................................... 175
B.2.3 AN-SMF (Access Network - System Management Function)................................ 175
B.2.4 AON- All Optical Network....................................................................................... 175
B.2.5 ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode)..................................................................... 175
B.3 B ....................................................................................................................................... 176
B.3.1 BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts) .......................................................................... 176
B.3.2 BORSCHT Functions............................................................................................. 176
B.3.3 Bridge..................................................................................................................... 176
B.4 C ....................................................................................................................................... 176
B.4.1 Cable Modem......................................................................................................... 176
B.4.2 Call Loss Ratio ....................................................................................................... 177
B.4.3 Client/Server .......................................................................................................... 177
B.5 D ....................................................................................................................................... 178
B.5.1 DAS........................................................................................................................ 178
B.5.2 Data Link ................................................................................................................ 178
B.5.3 DDN ....................................................................................................................... 178
B.5.4 Direct Dial-in .......................................................................................................... 178
B.5.5 DLC ........................................................................................................................ 179
B.5.6 DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) ................................................................................ 179
B.5.7 DTE/DCE/DTE Interface/DCE Interface ................................................................ 180
B.6 E ....................................................................................................................................... 181
B.6.1 E&M Signaling ....................................................................................................... 181
B.6.2 Erlang..................................................................................................................... 181
B.7 F........................................................................................................................................ 181
B.7.1 FAS (Flexible Access System) .............................................................................. 181
B.7.2 Fast Ethernet (100BASE-T) ................................................................................... 181
B.7.3 Frame Relay .......................................................................................................... 182
B.7.4 FXO (Foreign Exchange Office Interface) ............................................................. 182
B.7.5 FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber Interface) ...................................................... 182
B.8 G ....................................................................................................................................... 182
B.8.1 Gateway ................................................................................................................. 182
B.9 H ....................................................................................................................................... 183
B.9.1 HDLC (High Level Data Link Control) .................................................................... 183
B.9.2 HGRP (Huawei General Remote Subscriber Processing) .................................... 183
B.9.3 HONET................................................................................................................... 183
B.9.4 Hub......................................................................................................................... 183
B.10 I....................................................................................................................................... 184
B.10.1 Inter-module Interconnection and Inter-module Cascade ................................... 184
B.10.2 ISDN, N-ISDN and B-ISDN.................................................................................. 184
B.11 L...................................................................................................................................... 185
B.11.1 LAN (Local Area Network) ................................................................................... 185
B.11.2 Local Network ...................................................................................................... 185
B.12 M..................................................................................................................................... 186
B.12.1 MML ..................................................................................................................... 186
B.12.2 MODEM (Modulator-demodulator) ...................................................................... 186
B.13 N ..................................................................................................................................... 186
172
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
B.13.1 Narrowband and Broadband................................................................................ 186

B.13.2 NCP...................................................................................................................... 187
B.13.3 Network Clock/Service Clock/Transmission Clock/ Port Clock ........................... 187
B.13.4 Network Synchronization/Port Synchronization/BIT Synchronization ................. 187
B.13.5 Node..................................................................................................................... 187
B.14 O ..................................................................................................................................... 187
B.14.1 OMC 2000............................................................................................................ 187
B.14.2 On-line Test ......................................................................................................... 188
B.14.3 On-line Upgrade................................................................................................... 188
B.15 P ..................................................................................................................................... 188
B.15.1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) ............................................................................ 188
B.15.2 PON ..................................................................................................................... 188
B.16 Q ..................................................................................................................................... 189
B.16.1 Q3 Management Interface ................................................................................... 189
B.17 R ..................................................................................................................................... 189
B.17.1 R Series ONU and V Series ONU ....................................................................... 189
B.17.2 Router .................................................................................................................. 189
B.17.3 Routine Test......................................................................................................... 189
B.18 S ..................................................................................................................................... 190
B.18.1 SDH...................................................................................................................... 190
B.18.2 Server................................................................................................................... 191
B.18.3 SIPP (Service Interface and Protocol Processing Module) ................................. 191
B.18.4 SN: Service Node ................................................................................................ 191
B.18.5 SNI: Service Node Interface ................................................................................ 191
B.18.6 SPF: Service Port Function.................................................................................. 191
B.18.7 Synchronization and Asynchronization................................................................ 192
B.19 T...................................................................................................................................... 192
B.19.1 TCP/IP Protocol ................................................................................................... 192
B.19.2 Telecommunication Supporting Networks ........................................................... 192
B.19.3 TF: Transport Function ........................................................................................ 193
B.19.4 TMN (Telecommunications Management Network) ............................................ 193
B.19.5 TTL Level Interface and Differential Balance Level Interface.............................. 194
B.20 U ..................................................................................................................................... 194
B.20.1 UNI: User Network Interface ................................................................................ 194
B.20.2 UPF: User Port Function...................................................................................... 195
B.21 V ..................................................................................................................................... 195
B.21.1 V5 Interface.......................................................................................................... 195
B.21.2 V.35/V.24/U/E1 .................................................................................................... 195
B.21.3 VC/PVC/SVC/LC.................................................................................................. 195
B.21.4 VOD (Video on Demand) ..................................................................................... 196
B.22 W .................................................................................................................................... 196
B.22.1 Wide Area Network .............................................................................................. 196
B.23 X ..................................................................................................................................... 196
B.23.1 X.25 Protocol ....................................................................................................... 196
B.23.2 X.50 Protocol ....................................................................................................... 196

173
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 9 Glossary
9.1 112 Test
It refers to the test of fault codes through the local 112 centralized test system. Users can
request the system to test a fault code by dialing the local 112 special service number so
as to localize the fault and remove it.
9.2 A
9.2.1 AN: Access Network
The frame proposal concerning the access network of ITU (G.902) describes the
functional structure, access type, service node and network management interface, etc. of
the access network.
According to Proposal G.902, the access network is a system which is composed of
service node interface (SNI) and related user network unit (UNU) and provides the bearer
capability for transmitting telecom services. It is configured and managed though Q
interface. Therefore, an access network can be delimited by three interfaces, that is, it is
connected with the service node through SNI on the network side, with users through
UNI on the user side and with telecom management network (TMN) through Q interface
for management.
SN is the entity to provide services. SN to provide the specified services includes LE and
leased line service node or the service node for VOD and broadcast television of special
configuration.
SNI is the interface between AN and SN. It can be classified as SNI supporting a single
service access and SNI supporting integrated service access. The standard interfaces
supporting single service access include V1 interface at ISDN basic rate (2B+D) and V3
interface at primary group rate (30B+D). The interface supporting integrated service
access currently is V5, including V5.1 and V5.2.
UNI between AN and users can support all the access types and services currently
provided by the network. The development of AN should not limit the existing services
and access types.
The management of AN should be in the scope of TMN to facilitate the coordination and
management of different network elements. The management of AN includes not only
the management of the individual functional blocks of AN but also the test and fault
localization of subscriber lines.
According to the requirements for AN frame and structure, the major characteristics of
AN can be summarized as follows:
Provide bearer capability for the access service and perform transparent
transmission of the service.
Be transparent to user signaling. The functions of signaling and service
processing are still inside the service node except for the conversion of some
signaling formats.

174
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Should not limit the existing access types and services. AN should be
connected to SN through limited and standardized interfaces.
Have a network management system independent of SN. This system is
connected to TMN through a standard interface. TMN performs the operation,
maintenance and management of AN.
9.2.2 An: Access Node

An is a logic network element device in AN. It is normally located at the boundary
between AN feeder network (backbone network) and the distribution network. The
physical implementation of An includes various modes such as the optical network unit
(ONU) in optical access network and the user terminal in fixed wireless access network
(FWA) . The major function of An is to provide the common bearer path for transmission
between AN and SNI, provide the bearer path for some user transmission between AN
and the user terminal (TE) and perform the functions of UPF, CF, partial TF and ANSMF of AN.
The above terms which are related to each other are generally involved in the definition,
delimitation, functional structure and access structure of AN. For any error or mistake,
you are welcome to correct it.
9.2.3 AN-SMF (Access Network - System Management Function)
The main function of AN-SMF is to coordinate the provision, operation and maintenance
of UPF, SPF, CF and TF inside AN. It is also responsible for the mediation of the
operation of user terminal (through UNI) and service node (through SNI). Its major
functions include configuration and control, supply coordination, fault detection and
indication, collection of user information and performance data, security control,
mediation of the emergent management and operation of UPF and SN (through SN) and
resources management. AN-SMF communicates with TMN through Q3 interface to
accept monitoring and/or control. For real-time control, SN communicates with AN-SMF
through SNI.
9.2.4 AON- All Optical Network
All optical network is a network where electric/optical and optical/ electric conversions
of signals are conducted only when they come into and go out the network, and they
remain optical signals during the transmission and switching inside the network. Because
no electrical processing is involved in the whole process of transmission and switching,
PDH, SDH and ATM transmission modes can be used so that the utilization of the
network resources are improved.
9.2.5 ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode)
ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) converts multiple services of voice, image, data
and video into packets of the same length (53 bytes) (called cells) after digitizing them.
Each cell is divided into the information field (48 bytes) and the cell header (5 bytes) and
then transmitted according to the information in the cell header. The major advantage of

175
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
ATM is that voice, video and data can be transported in a single network and provide a
wide frequency band for the network to connect.
9.3 B
9.3.1 BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts)
BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts) is generally used to assess the call processing
capability of a SPC exchange. The actual BHCA value can be calculated with the
following formula:
Subscriber traffic(Erl/subscriber)
Quantity of subscribers
BH/CA (Call attempts/h)=
Average time taken by each call
Incoming trunk line traffic(Erl/line)

Incoming trunk line traffic
Average time taken by each call
9.3.2 BORSCHT Functions

Normally, the functions of the subscriber circuits of a digital exchange can be expressed
with the initials of the related words as BORSCHT. They are:
B--Battery feeding;
O--Over-voltage protection;
R--Ringing control;
S--Supervision of off-hook and on-hook;
C--Coder & filter;
H--Hybrid circuit of 2/4-wire switching;
T--Test.
9.3.3 Bridge
It operates on the second layer of OSI, i.e. the data link layer. Its operation is independent
of the protocol used in the network. It only divide the network into multiple segments
logically to facilitate the flow management of the local area network. The flow of the
home segment is filtered and then sent out through the bridge to provide flow balance of
the network.
It is a storage and transfer device and used for the connection of LANs of different
topological media of the network. It can perform the functions of the data link layer.
9.4 C
9.4.1 Cable Modem
Cable Modem is a device used to connect a data terminal (computer) to a cable TV
network (Cable TV) so that subscribers can use data communication, access Internet and
other information resources. Its major functions are to modulate digital signals into radio
frequency (RF) and demodulate the digital information in RF signals. In addition, a cable
176
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Modem also provides standard Ethernet interface and performs partially the functions of
the bridge, router, net card and line concentrator. Therefore, it is much more complex
than the traditional telephone dialing Modem.
A cable Modem provides bi-directional channels. The direction from the computer
terminal to the network is called the Upstream channel and that from the network to the
computer is called the Downstream channel.
The bandwidth of the upstream channel is typically in the range from 200kbit/s to
2Mbit/s, and can be up to 10Mbit/s. The carrier frequency range used for the upstream
channel is between 5MHz and 40MHz. Because this frequency band is apt to be
interfered by electrical home appliances, the channel environment is poorer. Therefore
the practical QPSK modulation is generally used.
The bandwidth of the downstream channel is typically in the range from 3Mbit/s to
10Mbit/s, and can be up to 36Mbit/s. The carrier frequency range used for the
downstream channel is between 42MHz and 750MHz. Normally, digital signals are
modulated to a 6MHz TV carrier. The typical modulation modes include QPSK and
QAM64. The former mode can provide 10Mbit/s bandwidth and the later mode can
provide 36Mbit/s bandwidth.
9.4.2 Call Loss Ratio
For a switching system with explicit loss system, a call which is failed because the
switching equipment is busy is called a "lost call". The ratio of the count of call loss to
the total call attempts is called "call loss ratio". It can be calculated with the following
formula:
P=
Cn
Co
Co- Cs
Co
,
Where C o is the total call attempts, C n is the count of calls failed because the switching
equipment is busy and C s is the count of calls successful in conversation.
During maintenance, "completion ratio" is commonly used to show the service quality of
an exchange. It is the ratio of the count of calls successful in conversation to the total call
attempts, that is,
P=
Cs
Co
9.4.3 Client/Server
It is a method for distributing information or files. The application program of the central
server saves files according to this method and supply them when the client application
program requests.
It is a kind of LAN structure, in which files and other resources are saved in a central
server computer. Everybody interacts with the network through the client computer to get
these resources.

177
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.5 D
9.5.1 DAS
DAS (Data Access System) refers generally to HONET DDN data service, excluding IP
service. The individual data service boards in DAS, such as SRX, DDU, DSL, HSL and
MLC, provide abundant types of data interfaces and access rates, such as NX64K rate
interface of V.35 type, 64Kdata interface of V.24 type and sub-rate interface, 2B1Q
interface, NX64K rate interface of FE1 type and 2.048M rate interface of E1 type etc.
User equipment such as MTA is also provided.
9.5.2 Data Link
Data link refers to data circuit plus transmission control protocol. The function of data
link is different from that of data circuit. Data link does not purely transmit data
information between two places. It exchanges information efficiently between two or
more DTEs according to the specified interactive operation mode. Therefore, a certain
protocol should be set up by the two communication sides to specify the information
format, communication sequence, error control, and the supervision and processing of the
cases occurring during the transmission and exchange of information. This protocol is
called the data link control protocol.
Data link is the data circuit that operates according to a certain control protocol.
9.5.3 DDN
DDN is widely applicable for users in finance, administration and large groups. It
provides users with permanent or semi-permanent connection of transparent and digital
dedicated lines. It performs LAN interconnection and forms a virtual private network for
users on one hand. On the other hand, it is used as the relay transmission of other data
networks (packet network, Internet and frame relay).
Generally, both synchronous and asynchronous sub-rate ports are provided at the
subscriber side of a DDN node device. These ports are routed to the MODEM frame in
the equipment room, and then connected to remote subscribers through twisted-pair
wires. For 64K and 128K services, they are connected to the remote end through a base
band MODEM. For 128K or higher rates, the access is made through G.703 interface and
with xDSL technology.
Sub-rate multiplexing is conducted inside the node device. It may be different for
different manufacturers. However, when the sub-rate multiplexing service is provided by
different devices connected across networks, the equipment at both sides should provide
X.50/X.58 multiplexing protocol (the common one is X.50 protocol) .
9.5.4 Direct Dial-in
There are several modes for SPC exchange to log in the local public network as follows:
semi-automatic direct dial-in (DOD2+BID) ; full-automatic direct dial-in (DOD1+DID)
and hybrid mode.

178
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
The semi-automatic direct dial-in mode is DOD2+BID (Direct Outward Dialing-2, Board
Inward Dialing) . DOD2 refers to that an extension subscriber can dial directly for
outgoing call with the dialing tone heard twice. The first is the dialing tone sent out by
the local private branch exchange and the second is the dialing tone sent out by the public
exchange. BID refers to that the called is called out by the traffic console dialing the
extension number when the public exchange calls in the extension subscriber of the
private branch exchange. This mode is applicable for the login of smaller-capacity PBE.
The full-automatic direct dial-in mode is DOD1+DID (Direct Outward Dialing-1, Direct
Inward Dialing) . That is to say an extension subscriber can dial directly for outgoing call
with the dialing tone heard only once from the local private branch exchange without the
dialing tone set by the public exchange. When calling an extension subscriber, the
extension number is dialed by the opposite end. The caller of the public exchange does
not know that the called is an extension through PBE. PBE is not equipped with a traffic
console. This mode is applicable for the login of larger-capacity PBE.
The hybrid login mode includes DOD2+DID and DOD+BID+DID.
9.5.5 DLC
DLC (digital line carrier) is the access network equipment between the network node SN
and the subscriber terminal. DLC consists of an office equipment, a remote equipment
and an optical line terminal.
9.5.6 DSL (Digital Subscriber Line)
DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is a technology that uses the advanced digital technology
to expand the transmission bandwidth of the existing copper-wire telephone subscriber
lines.
For many years, telephone subscriber lines are constructed with the twisted-pair copperwire cables, which can not transmit high-frequency signals. In 1987, Bellcore (Bell
Telecom Institute, U.S. A) first introduced "DSL" (Digital Subscriber Line).
DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an access network technology which is developing
continuously. This technology refers to that broadband signals are transported through the
conventional subscriber copper lines by using digital technology and Modem. The digital
subscriber line solutions existing at present include ADSL, HDSL, SDSL and VDSL.
These solutions are all implemented through a pair of Modems with one modem located
at the telecom office and the other modem at the subscriber site. Because most of DSL
technologies do not occupy the whole bandwidth of twisted-pair wires, a space is left for
the voice channel. For example, subscribers connected to Internet with ADSL modem can
still make calls through the same pair of wires. The four basic types of DSL are
separately described as follows:
I. ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line)
ADSL is designed that the bandwidth of the downstream transport (downlink i.e. from
the central exchange to the subscriber side) is wider than that of the upstream transport
(up-link i.e. from the subscriber side to the central exchange). Therefore, it is suitable for
Internet access. Its down-link rate is from 1.5Mbit/s to 9Mbit/s, and the up-link rate is
from 16kbit/s to 640kbit/s. The transport distance over a pair of twisted wires can be up
179
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
to about 5km. In addition to Internet access, telecom departments also desire to use
ADSL for access to remote LAN or VOD services.
II. HDSL (High-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line)
HDSL is different from ADSL. It is symmetric and transports data of 1.544Mbit/s

bandwidth uniformly through two pairs of twisted copper wires in both directions. In fact,
HDSL transport rate just matches the rate of T1 pipe line. So telecom offices in North
America have used this technology to provide the local access T1 service, as possible.
The transport distance of HDSL is shorter than that of ADSL. When the subscriber line is
longer than 3.6km, it is necessary for the telecom office to install a signal regenerator to
extend the service range. Because HDSL requires two pairs of twisted wires, it is initially
used for PBX network connection, digital loop carrier system, Internet service and
dedicated data exchange.
III. SDSL (Single-line Digital Subscriber Line)
SDSL is similar to HDSL and can transport 1.544Mbit/s bandwidth in both directions
(up-link and downlink). But it uses one pair of twisted wires. Its transport distance is
limited due to one pair of twisted wires. The transport range for SDSL application is
about 3 km. It can find applications in small areas, such as home video conference or
remote LAN access.
IV. VDSL (Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line)
VDSL is asymmetric. Its transport range is from 300m to about 1.4km. But its transport
bandwidth is very large. In a pair of twisted copper wires, its down-link rate can reach
3Mbit/s to 52Mbit/s, and the up-link rate can reach 1.5Mbit/s to 2.3Mbit/s. The larger
bandwidth allows the telecom departments to transport high-resolution TV (HDTV)
programs with VDSL technology.
9.5.7 DTE/DCE/DTE Interface/DCE Interface
DTE (data terminal equipment) is the communication source or destination in a data
communication model, such as a PC. DCE (Data Circuit- Terminating Equipment) is the
equipment located between the communication source and the destination for switching
and processing of communication channels, such as MODEM. DSE (data switch
equipment) is the equipment for switching and connecting data channels, such as a node
device. Generally, the interface for DTE output is called DTE interface (M head), and
that for DCE output is called DCE interface (F head). Each Interface in a data channel
can only be that DTE interface (DCE) is connected with DCE interface (DTE). It is not
allowed to connect interfaces of the same type. This is involved with the
transmitting/receiving of signals and the clock direction. But interface and equipment
have no such corresponding relationship. DTE can also output through DCE interface and
DCE can output through DTE interface. So DTE and DCE interfaces can be interchanged
flexibly. The various data ports of an access network can provide DTE or DCE interfaces
as required on the site. HONET access network provides V.24/V.35 DTE or DCE
interfaces.

180
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.6 E
9.6.1 E&M Signaling
It refers to a transmission system that uses separated paths to transmit signaling and
voice. "M" (Mouth) wire transmits signals to the remote end of the line while "E" (Ear)
wire receives the incoming signals.
9.6.2 Erlang
Traffic amount refers typically to the voice passing capability of the voice channel part of
a SPC exchange. The formula for the calculation is:
A=c*t, where A is the traffic amount, c is the average call attempts during a specific time
and t is the average time taken by each call.
The unit of traffic amount is "Erlang", or "call per hour". The average traffic amount
during the busiest hour is called "Busy hour call attempts".
9.7 F
9.7.1 FAS (Flexible Access System)
FAS (Flexible Access System) is a mode which provides a wide range of communication
services. It is a flexible mode for users. These services can transit at the user premises or
in a public network. A flexible access system is composed of a flexible multiplexer (FM)
and a flexible access terminal (FAT). Refer to ITU-T G.797 and ITU-T G.785.
9.7.2 Fast Ethernet (100BASE-T)
It is a new Ethernet standard specified by IEEE 802.3 committee. Its standard name is
IEEE 803.3u.
Compared with 10BASE-T, the media access control protocol of 100BASE-Tstill uses
CSMA/CD. However, a lot of new technologies have been introduced on the physical
layer. At present, there are three types of 100BASE-T due to the difference in the new
technologies used on the physical layer.
I. 100BASE-TX
100BASE-TX uses two pairs of Class 5 UTP (un-shielded twisted-pair wires) or STP
(shielded twisted-pair wires) to receive and transmit data respectively. The source code
and channel code are respectively 4B/5B and multi-level transformation (MLT) -3.
Therefore, the system clock is 41.6MHz (100MHzX5/4) /3). In fact, the physical layer of
100BASE-Tx still uses the twisted-pair wire FDDI technology. So it was put in
production quickly and has occupied the market of fast Ethernet soon.
II. 100BASE-FX
100BASE-FX uses two pairs of fiber lines to separately receive and transmit data. The
source code and channel code are respectively 4B/5B and NRZ. Therefore, the system

181
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
clock is 125MHz (100MHzX5/4) . It has excellent performance and longer

communication distance due to fiber line used as the medium.
III. 100BASE-T4
100BASE-T4 uses four pairs of UTP (Class 3, Class 4 or Class 5). The first pair is used
for transmitting data from the user to hub and checking for any conflict. The second pair
is used for transmitting data from the hub to the user and checking of any conflict. The
third and the forth pairs can transmit data in both directions. Therefore, there are three
pairs of wires for transmitting and receiving data separately. The code is 8B/6T. So the
system clock is 25MHz (100MHzX6/8) /3). The most obvious feature of 100BASE-T4 is
convenience for application. On one hand, the existing 10BASE-T cables can be used; on
the other hand; the system clock is 25MHz upgraded from 20MHz of 10BASE-T.
According to the related statistics, the price of 100BASE-T4 is only twice the price of
10BASE-T, but the throughput is 10 times.
At present, Intel, Broadcom, DEC, Bay Networks and 3COM etc. companies have fast
Ethernet products.
9.7.3 Frame Relay
Frame relay is a data transmission technology developed on the basis of X.25 proposal
and oriented to frames of variable length. It is developing rapidly and addresses the
transition from the existing public communication network to ATM network
satisfactorily.
Frame relay is of two types as permanent virtual circuit (PVC) and switching virtual
circuit (SVC). At present, the frame relay bearer providers in all countries only provide
PVC service used mainly for LAN interconnections, providing multi-media service and
setting up virtual private network etc.
9.7.4 FXO (Foreign Exchange Office Interface)
It is a voice interface. In relation to the central exchange, it simulates a PABX extension
and can perform the connection of PABX extension with a multiplexer.
9.7.5 FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber Interface)
It is a voice interface. It simulates the extension interface of a PABX (or the subscriber
interface of a central exchange) and can perform the connection of an ordinary telephone
set with a multiplexer.
9.8 G
9.8.1 Gateway
It is a high-layer protocol operating from the transport layer to the application layer of
OSI. It can connect the communication between networks using different protocols. Its
operating procedures depend on the demand of the actual application and can be used for
the communication between various application processes. Its processing speed is lower
182
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
due to the longer time for processing of the process exchange. For LAN interconnection,
router is generally used.
It is a high-layer connection and used for the connectors on the transport layer or higher.
9.9 H
9.9.1 HDLC (High Level Data Link Control)
HDLC (High Level Data Link Control) is a bit-oriented synchronous communication
protocol developed by the International Standard Organization (ISO) (bit-oriented refers
to that it can transmit the information of any bit combinations). In terms of link access
protocol, HDLC has the following major sub-sets: LAP (link access protocol), LAPB
(balance link access protocol), LAPD (link access protocol of ISDN D channel).
Frame structure of HDLC:
Flag
Address
Control
Information
FCS
Flag
The frame header consists of the frame flag field (F), the address field (A) and the control
field (C). The frame end consists of the frame check sequence field (FCS) and the frame
flag field. The information field is in the middle.
The control field (C) defines three types of frames: information frame (I frame),
supervision frame (S frame) and un-coded frame (U frame). I frame is used to transport
the information field. S frame has no information field and is used to protect the correct
transmission of I frame. U frame is used for the control of connection and disconnection
of links rather than the control of information transmission.
9.9.2 HGRP (Huawei General Remote Subscriber Processing)
HGRP (Huawei General Remote Subscriber Processing) is used for the communication
between HONET OLT and R series ONU.
9.9.3 HONET
HONET is a registered trademark of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. It refers to Huawei
Integrated Service Access Network and the English meaning is Home Optical Network.
HONET Integrated Service Access Network supports the integrated service access to
voice, data and image. It can satisfy the requirements of both public network and private
network simultaneously.
9.9.4 Hub
It is similar to a multi-port bridge. It integrates the functions of a high-rate multi-port
bridging device to provide the switching connection in segment and the bandwidth
required by the network terminal station.

183
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.10 I
9.10.1 Inter-module Interconnection and Inter-module Cascade
Inter-module interconnection refers to the 2M interconnection between two modules of
HONET access network through the inter-module interface. Inter-module cascade refers
to the interconnection between OLT and ONU of HONET access network through V5
interface.
9.10.2 ISDN, N-ISDN and B-ISDN
With the introduction of digital technology, many changes have taken place in
communication network. Digital switching and digital transmission has been
implemented in communication service. In the early 80'
s, various communication
services were switched and transmitted basically by independent networks. For example,
voice service was performed by the telephone network, fax service was transmitted by the
fax network and the data service was transmitted by the data communication network.
Moreover, independent terminal equipment were required for the individual services.
Special interfaces should be used for the interconnection between individual networks.
The fact that analog signals can be converted into digital form through digital processing
reminded people to use a single communication network for transmitting various
communication services.
In December 1972, CCITT raised the general proposal of ISDN (integrated service digital
network) and specified the reference model of ISDN to support voice and other non-voice
services by providing end-to-end digital connection. After that, the developed countries
started the research and experiment. Up till now, many countries have established or are
establishing their own ISDN.
ISDN is neither a communication network independent of telephone network, data
network and fax network, nor an integrated communication network in place of them. In
fact, it is developed on the basis of telephone integrated digital network (IDN) and by
incorporating additional functions and some private networks. Therefore, ISDN is a
structure concept that implements the simultaneous transmission of multiple services as
telephone, fax, data and image. Essentially, it uses a common digital path to serve
terminals of different services. Standard interfaces are used between the individual
service terminals and this path. With ISDN, users can implement the simultaneous
transmission of both voice and non-voice services as well as the information service
connected with computers. And new communication services can be expanded
continuously.
At the 9th CCITT conference in 1988, the basic functions and features of ISDN were
specified in principle:
ISDN supports the transmission of both voice and non-voice services in the same
network. The critical technology to implement this service integration is to use a set of
specified connection modes and the multi-purpose subscriber - network interface
configuration (I series of CCITT proposal).
ISDN supports various applications of switching connection and non-switching
connections. The switching connection includes circuit switching, packet switching and
the related links.
184
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
ISDN should have the flexibility (intelligence) aimed to provide service features,
maintenance and network management functions.
ISDN can be implemented in various structures according to the special conditions of
each country and based on the domestic schedule of network change.
The currently set-up ISDN is actually N-ISDN (narrow band integrated service digital
network) because it only transmits narrow band services such as telephone, fax and low
bit-rate data. Its rate is 16kbit/s~1.5Mbit/s or 2Mbit/s.
ISDN will be developed continuously from the existing N-ISDN to the new generation of
ISDN i.e. B-ISDN (broadband integrated service digital network). B-ISDN is able to
transmit broadband services such as CATV, HDTV, video conference and high bit-rate
data. Its rate can reach the magnitude of Gbit/s. B-ISDN can also integrate video
broadcast with video communication. It is predicted that the information amount of BISDN will be increasing continuously and the rate will be up to the magnitude of Tbit/s in
the next 5 years. To realize this goal, every country is stepping up the research and
development of new technologies to be used in B-ISDN (such as ATM, coherent light
wave transmission and personal communication system).
9.11 L
9.11.1 LAN (Local Area Network)
LAN (local area network) is an important part of computer communication network. It is
a computer communication network formed by interconnecting various computers,
peripheral equipment and database etc. in a local area (such as a school, a factory, a
hospital or an organization).
A local area network can be interconnected with other local area networks, database or
processing center through data communication network or dedicated data circuits to form
an information processing center in a wide area.
9.11.2 Local Network
Local network is the short form of local telephone network. It is a telephone network
composed of a number of end offices tandem exchanges as well as inter-office trunks, toll
and city trunks, subscriber lines and telephone terminals in the range of the same toll
zone code.
Every local network is an automatic telephone switching network with an independent
toll zone code. The range of the toll zone code is the coverage of the local network.
Subscribers in the same local network call one other only by dialing the local telephone
numbers.
A local network is formed by expanding the local telephone network. When automatic
connection is implemented in city suburbs, counties, towns and rural areas, they are
integrated to form a local network with the aim of facilitating the development of telecom
service and the use by subscribers, thus reducing investment in network construction and
improving efficiency and management.

185
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.12 M
9.12.1 MML
MML (Man-Machine Language) is an interface using pure character stream and in F
mode for information exchange between the user and the system.
9.12.2 MODEM (Modulator-demodulator)
MODEM is a communication equipment. Its function is to transmit digital signals in an
analog communication channel. It is formed by combining modulation and demodulation.
At present, most of personal computers log in the computer network system through the
public telephone network. The telephone system is basically an analog signal system
while the computer processes and transmits digital signals. To allow digital signals to be
transmitted in the telephone network, it is necessary to have a device that can convert
digital signals into analog signals. It is the modulator-demodulator or called Modem. At
the receiving end, it is also necessary to have such a device to convert the analog signals
into the digital signals that the computer can recognize.
Besides, the internal bus of a computer is generally 16 bits, 32 bits or 64 bits while the
telephone line has only one pair of wires. Modem is also required to convert the parallel
digital signals into serial analog signals, such as converting the 8-bit signal printed by the
computer into 8 1-bit signals.
In terms of processing rate, MODEM at 20K or lower processing rate is called frequency
band MODEM, MODEM at the processing rate higher than 20K and lower than 2M is
called base band MODEM (or short-distance MODEM), MODEM at the processing rate
higher than 2M is called broadband MODEM, and MODEM which can process both
frequency band and base band is called hybrid MODEM. In terms of dialing, MODEM
can be classified as dialing MODEM and dedicated line MODEM. Some dialing Modems
can also be used as dedicated line Modems, but a dedicated line Modem can only be used
as dedicated line Modem.
9.13 N
9.13.1 Narrowband and Broadband
Narrow-band and broadband are classified according to the bandwidth or the rate of the
communication channel. Basically, 2M rate is used as the critical value. Broadband refers
to rates higher than 2M and narrow-band refers to rates equal to or lower than 2M. Both
narrow-band and broadband here are related to a service, which is called narrow-band
service and broadband service. For example, analog voice, sub-rate and 2M leased line
are narrow-band service and VOD and ADSL high-speed login is broadband service.
Narrow-band service is sometimes called quasi-broadband service.

186
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.13.2 NCP
NCP (Network Control Point) provides an unified centralized line test interface and a
number distribution interface. It can accomplish the test and number distribution of
multiple HONET access networks and CC08 exchanges.
9.13.3 Network Clock/Service Clock/Transmission Clock/ Port Clock
Clock has great effect on synchronization. Network clock refers to the sync clock of the
whole communication network i.e. DT8K clock. In a sync network, the lower level
should be locked in the upper-level clock. Service clock refers to the operating clock
specially for a service. For example, the service clock for a synchronous 64K data
channel is 64K. Transmission clock is the clock of the transmission system. It is different
from the network clock and the service clock. As long as the clock of the transmission
network is synchronized, the service clock can be transmitted in a fully transparent way.
Port clock is the clock at the user port.
9.13.4 Network Synchronization/Port Synchronization/BIT Synchronization
Network synchronization refers to the clock synchronization of the whole network. For
example, the lower-level network should be synchronized with the upper-level network.
When HONET access network is connected with a data network, it should be
synchronized with this network for a network with circuit exchange technology. For
example, DDN can extract clock only through E1 port rather than any other user port. For
a network with packet exchange technology, it may not be synchronized with this
network if the user ports are used for the connection.
Port synchronization refers to the clock synchronization at the user ports of both sides
such as V24 or V35. BIT synchronization is the bit synchronization received/transmitted
at the ports of both sides. For sync communication, synchronization is required strictly.
Network sync, port sync and bit sync should be implemented. For async communication,
the requirement is less. Only bit sync is required at the receiving/transmitting ports
connected with each other.
9.13.5 Node
It is any computer or other equipment in a network, which can generate, receive or
transfer signals, including repeater, file server and shared peripheral equipment.
9.14 O
9.14.1 OMC 2000
OMC 2000 is the short form of the Integrated Operation and Maintenance Center 2000. It
is used in the network management center for the centralized management of various
Huawei products (including exchange, access network, intelligent network and
transmission equipment) in a certain region.

187
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.14.2 On-line Test

In order to improve the maintainability of a system, a complete set of routine test and
diagnosis is provided to allow the maintenance personnel to identify and remove the
system fault by themselves. It allows the ordinary maintenance personnel to understand
the system operation clearly and quickly with the report of the routine test and the
operation report, localize a fault quickly with the diagnosis system and remove the fault
with the system prompts. Moreover it provides the professional maintenance personnel
with some necessary means for fault analysis and localization (such as port loop-back,
error bit test) so that the maintenance personnel can be independent of the special testers
to some extent. Based on this, a complete and efficient set of procedures for daily
maintenance can be developed to improve the equipment maintenance and service
quality.
9.14.3 On-line Upgrade
It is also called on-line expansion. HONET access network provides the capability of online upgrade. A station can be added and deleted, and the equipment can be expanded
easily without interrupting the service. HONET access network is a modular system
structure. It can support the system expansion of different service types and different
capacities by adding board, functional block and equipment.
9.15 P
9.15.1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) coding is to take samples of voice signal, and then
quantize each of the samples. The 64kbit/s voice code standard G.711 of CCITT (ITU-T
at present) adopts PCM coding. The sampling rate is 8kHz. Each sample is encoded with
8bit non-linear u law or A law. The total rate is 64kbit/s.
9.15.2 PON
PON (Passive Optical Network) is a kind of passive optical access network. It adopts the
multi-address multiplexing technology and the passive optical demultiplexing technology
to form multiple network structures of tree, star and bus types. It can accomplish
FTTC/FTTB. Passive optical tributaries are used in PON system without active electronic
device. This makes PON transparent to all services. PON is stable and easy in upgrade,
expansion, maintenance and management. It can implement equipment/line sharing, so it
is cost-effective. It can be used as the backbone and the distribution section of the access
network. The small-capacity PON is particularly suitable for the lower end of the
networks in scattered zones and villages.

188
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.16 Q
9.16.1 Q3 Management Interface
The management of AN is in the scope of TMN management. Therefore, AN should be
connected with TMN through the standard management interface Q3 of TMN and via the
mediation device (MD) so as to mediate the management of UPF, TF and SPF by
different network elements (such as AN and SN) in a unified way and form the access
services and bearer capability required by users.
9.17 R
9.17.1 R Series ONU and V Series ONU
When only the subscriber frame RSP of SIPP module is configured in an OUN, it is
called R series ONU. R series OUN does not have the capabilities of 64kbit/s crossconnection and V5 protocol processing. Its services are connected to OLT through E1
link (HGRP interface). V5 protocol processing and semi-permanent service are
accomplished by OLT.
When the main control unit PV8 of SIPP module is configured in an ONU, it is called V
series ONU. V series ONU has the functions of 64kbit/s cross-connection, V5 protocol
processing, system timing and network management. It can be connected directly to the
local exchange or interconnected with OLT or other V series ONUs through module
cascade (interconnection). V series ONU has the functions of both the main control frame
and the subscriber frame, which has broken through the star structure with OLT as the
center of the traditional access network and can be independent of OLT.
9.17.2 Router
It operates on the third layer of OSI i.e. the network layer. It approves and arranges the
serial number and flow of the messages received. Its operating procedure depends on the
network layer protocol used inside the network. So it is necessary to know the topological
structure of the network. It divides the whole network into a number of sub-networks and
is used for the communication between the sub-networks. It is beneficial to maintenance
and management to divide a larger network logically into a number of sub-networks.
It makes network interconnection and can perform (1) flow control; (2) error control; (3)
routing and (4) data packet exchange etc.
9.17.3 Routine Test
It is a test task performed automatically and periodically at a specified time. A routine
test report will be generated as the result, which can be called out and viewed at any time.
The main purpose of routine test is to find out fault. When an abnormality is found by the
routine test, it is necessary to use diagnosis to localize the fault. HONET system provides
two types of routine test tasks: routine test of bi-directional call and routine test of error
bit.

189
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.18 S
9.18.1 SDH
SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) is the very basic element for forming the
information highway. It is a new digital transmission system and a revolution of telecom
transmission system.
The information highway bears analogy to the current freeway of the transportation
system. The road is SDH transmission system (optical fiber is used as the transmission
medium. Microwave and satellites can also be used for SDH transmission) signal. A large
bridge is a large-scale ATM exchange. The add/drop multiplexers (ADM) in SDH are the
small bridges and intersections. The "vehicles" running along "SDH highway" will be
various telecom services (voice, data and image etc.).
Compared with the traditional PDH technology, SDH technology has the obvious
advantages as follows:
I. Unified bit rate
In PDH, there are three rate systems as European, North America and Japanese systems
in the world. But in SDH, bit rate is unified. Besides, a unified optical interface standard
is specified. Thus it is possible to interconnect equipment of different manufacturers.
II. Powerful network management capability
Abundant network management bytes are specified in SDH frame structure, which can
provide the capability to meet various requirements.
III. Self-healing protection ring
In SDH equipment, a ring network with self-healing protection can be formed to

effectively prevent the transmission media from being disconnected and the
communication service from being terminated.
IV. Byte multiplexing used in SDH technology
If analogizing the major difference between SDH technology and PDH technology with
railroad transportation, PDH technology is like a bulk cargo train with all cargoes
(services) stacked in the train cells. To load down a certain packet (a transmission
service) at a station, you have to first load down all the cargoes from the train and find
out the one you want. And then you have to load all the remaining cargoes and the newly
loaded cargo at this station onto the train one by one, and then transport them. Therefore
PDH technology need a lot of multiplexing equipment configured for individual subgroups at the locations wherever add/drop circuits are required. SDH is like a container
train. All cargoes (services) are loaded into the container with tags (various overheads)
stuck on them. Then a small container is loaded into a larger one. In this way, one level is
linked with another level so that a certain packet of cargo can be accurately found out and
loaded down from the fast-running train with the tags at each level. It is not necessary to
load down all the cargoes and find out the desired one (with the tags, a packet can be
located to the container at a certain level in a certain train cell). So only in SDH can
circuits be added/dropped simply.
190
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Therefore, it is positive that the information highway to be implemented soon will be

basically composed of SDH equipment. Only the tributaries and extensions connected to
the highway still have some PDH equipment remained.
9.18.2 Server
It is a system program which supports the resource management of the service system
and executes the subscriber requests. It runs in a host which provides network service.
9.18.3 SIPP (Service Interface and Protocol Processing Module)
SIPP (Service Interface and Protocol Processing) is the service core of HONET
integrated service access network. It includes the main control unit and the subscriber
unit, and performs the functions of system control, V5 protocol processing, system timing
and subscriber access etc.
SIPP module includes the following types:
GV5 main control unit, which is classified as three types: GV5-I main control
frame, GV5-II main control frame and GV5-III main control frame;
The subscriber unit, which is classified as two types: RSP subscriber frame;
PV8 main control frame that concentrates the functions of both the main control
unit and the subscriber unit.
9.18.4 SN: Service Node

SN is the entity to provide service. It is a network element which can make access to
various switch and/ or permanent-connection telecom services. SN which can provide the
specified service includes LE, leased line SN or VOD and broadcast TV SN.
9.18.5 SNI: Service Node Interface
SNI is the interface between AN and SN. If AN-SNI point and SNI-SN point are at
different locations, remote connection can be implemented through transparent
transmission channel. Normally, AN need to support a lot of types of access services.
Multiple or multiple types of SNs are involved. For the integrated access types of PSTN
and N-ISDN-BRA, the standard SNI includes V5.1 and V5.2 interfaces. For the
integrated access types of PSTN, N-ISDNBRA and PRA, the standard SNI is V5.2
interface. For the independent access type of B-ISDN, the standard SNI is VB1.
9.18.6 SPF: Service Port Function
The main function of SPF is to adapt the requirement specified by a special SNI to the
common bearer channel for CF to process. It is also responsible for selecting the related
information to process it in ANSMF. The major functions include termination of SNI
function, mapping of the requirement of the bearer channel and the requirement of the
emergent management and operation into CF, mapping of the protocol required by a
special SNI, test of SNI and the maintenance, management and control of SPF.

191
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.18.7 Synchronization and Asynchronization

They are the communication modes used by the two sides for communication with the
same clock. Synchronous communication requires clock synchronization through the
whole data channel. The receiving/transmitting of sync communication data are separated
from the clock synchronization. There is no other overhead bit in the data channel and the
data can be received/transmitted in blocks. Therefore, the communication efficiency is
higher.
For async communication, the receiving side and the transmitting side are controlled by
the async cell in the data channel. The system clocks of the two sides are not restricted
strictly as long as the bits are synchronized at the interface. The async cell consists of the
start bit/data bit/check bit/stop bit. Because start/interrupt/check control and overhead bits
are added in the data channel and data can only be transmitted byte by byte, the
communication efficiency is lower. It is suitable for 64K or lower sub-rate.
HONET access network can provide the standard synchronous or asynchronous channel
of 2.4K or higher. The synchronous application of lower than 2.4K is few in practice. But
for asynchronous rate lower than 2.4K, such as 0.6K and 2K, there is a solution in data
communication that the async rate service can be transmitted through a sync channel at
the rate four times of the async rate. In this way, HONET only needs to provide 2.4K and
4.8K channels for async 0.6K and 2K.
9.19 T
9.19.1 TCP/IP Protocol
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is the basis and core of
Internet. Internet is for the intercommunication between various types of computers with
a set of rules and protocols. Its core is the well-known TCP/IP. TCP/IP is the
communication protocol used in ARPANET - the predecessor of Internet in 1983 and has
become a standard. The so-called communication protocol is a set of formats and
conventions for the normal data communication between different equipment in the
network. It is pre-defined, known and followed by the two communication sides. TCP/IP
protocol is almost the code name of Internet. There would be no current Internet without
TCP/IP protocol.
9.19.2 Telecommunication Supporting Networks
A complete telephone network needs a number of supporting networks to ensure the
normal operation of the service network, enhance the functions and improve the service
quality of the network in addition to the service network for transmitting telephone
information. The related monitoring and control signals are transmitted in the supporting
networks.
The supporting networks include synchronization network, common-channel signaling
network, transmission supervision network and network management network etc. A
synchronization network is used in a digital network for the synchronization of clock rate
between digital exchanges, and between the digital exchange and the digital transmission
equipment. In an analog network, all primary oscillators are calibrated and controlled
192
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
automatically or manually to make them consistent in frequency. A common-channel

signaling network is used specially for the transmission of signaling information between
the exchanges at different levels in the network. A transmission supervision network is
used to monitor and control the operation of the transmission system in the network. A
network management network is used to monitor and control the service quality of the
telephone network as well as direct and dispatch network channels so as to make full use
of them.
9.19.3 TF: Transport Function
TF is to provide transport channel for the common bearer channel between different
locations in AN. It also provides media adaptation for the used transmission media. The
major functions include multiplexing, cross-connection, management and physical media.
9.19.4 TMN (Telecommunications Management Network)
TMN (Telecommunications Management Network) is a new network proposed by
CCITT (the current ITU-T) for managing telecom networks to suit the integration and
broadband features of modern communication. Traditional telecommunication
management network is generally for a specific telecom equipment or service so that the
adaptability of the network management system is significantly limited. Moreover, the
interconnection between network management systems is very difficult, which is difficult
to meet the requirements of management network function for modern telecom
development. The increase in the complexity and the requirement of automatic
management of modern telecom networks require a structured network management
approach urgently so as to efficiently manage telecom networks, equipment and services.
TMN is a network independent of the telecom network logically. It communicates with
the telecom network through several standard reference points of different types to
further manage the telecom network. Although the telecom management network is
independent logically, it can still use part of the resources of the telecom network to
perform communication. For example, In SDH network, TMN information can be
transmitted through the embedded control channel (ECC) of SDH. In general, telecom
management network has the five functions as follows: Fault Management, Configuration
Management, Accounting Management, Performance Management and Security
Management.
M.30 Proposal formed by ITU-T defines the frame structure, functional structure,
physical structure and information structure of TMN. In functional structure, TMN can be
divided into three blocks as the system function block, the workstation function block and
the mediation function block. The meanings of the English abbreviations are as follows:
OSF----Operation System Functions
WSF----Workstation Functions
DCF----Data Communication Functions
MF----Mediation Functions
NEF----Network Element Functions
QAF----Q Adapter Functions
The communication between the functional blocks is made with the data communication
function (DCF). The functional blocks are interconnected through a number of
193
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
standardized reference points (q, x, f). Among them, qx point of q type is for the
interconnection between NEF and MF, MF and MF, and QAF and MF. q3 point is for the
interconnection between NEF and OSF, MF and OSF, QAF and OSF, and OSF and OSF.
F reference point is for the interconnection between WSF and OSF, MF and WSF, and x
point is for the interconnection between TMNs or between TMN and the management
networks of other types.
The physical structure of TMN implements the functional structure while the information
structure is involved in the data expression method of the network resources. According
to ITU-T M.3010 proposal, the information model structure is established with the
information modeling technology of OSI system management. OSI system management
manages the physical or logical network resources in a uniform and general-purpose way.
These resources are abstracted as management objects and described with abstract syntax
and notation ASN.1 through object-oriented method. These objects are stored in a
database called management information base (MIB). The exchange of the management
information follows the common management information protocol (CMIP).
9.19.5 TTL Level Interface and Differential Balance Level Interface
TTL level interface is the most common type of interface. It is commonly used as the
intra-board and inter-board interface. Its signal rate is limited in 20~30MHz and the
power capacity is typically a few milliamps to dozens of milliamps.
Differential balance level interface is powerful in anti-interference because signals
transmitted by the twisted-pair of wires are supplementary to each other. It can transmit
through a longer distance and at higher rate. When it is matched properly, 2MHZ signals
can be transmitted up to 15m.
Differential balance level interfaces commonly used include RS422 interface (end-to-end
transmission) and RS485 interface (differential bus transmission). Both of them adopt
double-end balance transmission i.e. balance-driving and balance differential input at
both ends. The maximum transmission rate of RS422 interface is 10Mb/s. At the
maximum rate, the transmission distance can reach 120m. Also, RS422 interface level is
ITU-T V.11 level.
9.20 U
9.20.1 UNI: User Network Interface
UNI is the interface between the user and the network. Along with the user port function
(UPF), it set up fixed contact with only one SNI through the supply function. This
principle is not only transparent to the independent UNI but also applicable for the shared
UNI. In case of independent UNI, the UNI specified by ITU-T (including the various
demultiplexed telephone networks and UNI of ISDN) should be used in AN so as to
support the access types and services provided currently. When one or more SNs can be
connected through an independent UNI (for example, UNI uses ATM mode), an
independent UNI is able to support multiple logical accesses. Each of the logical accesses
is connected to different SNs through a SNI.

194
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
9.20.2 UPF: User Port Function

The function of UPF is to adapt the special UNI requirement to CF and SMF. Its major
functions include the termination of UNI function, A/D conversion and signaling
conversion, activation/deactivation of UNI, processing of UNI bearer channel/capacity,
test of UNI and the maintenance, management and control of UPF.
9.21 V
9.21.1 V5 Interface
V5 interface is a standardized and fully open interface for the connection between AN
and LE such as V5.1 interface and V5.2 interface. Please refer to ITU-T G.964 and G.965
Proposals.
9.21.2 V.35/V.24/U/E1
V.24/V.35/E1/U are all interface standards of the physical layer according to OSI
standard. They specify the mechanical, electrical and signal characteristics of interfaces.
V.24 interface is RS232 interface of DB25 mechanical structure and used for 64K or
lower data channels. V.35 interface adopts the electrical characteristics of balance
double-flow interface circuit and of DB34 mechanical structure. It can meet the
transmission requirement in the range from 64K to 2M. E1 interface is the standard PCM
primary rate interface. It is used mainly for the direct trunk interconnecting circuit
between OLT and the node machine or the standard E1 leased line. U interface uses the
standard 2B1Q code and its theoretical distance can reach 5KM. It is used for the
interconnection between the network equipment end of the node machine and the line
terminal equipment. For example, U interface is used between New Bridge 3600 node
machine and its DTU 2701 for transmission and management. For the interconnection
between data equipment, the interfaces at both sides should match with each other. For
example, if E1 interfaces are used at both sides, all hardware parameters related to E1
interfaces should be in consistence, such as impedance, frame structure and CRC4 check,
etc. Conversion can be made between some interfaces. For example, V.24 interface can
be converted to V.35 interface, and 25-pin V.24 interface can be converted to 9-pin
interface.
9.21.3 VC/PVC/SVC/LC
VC (Virtual Connection) is the concept between DTE and DTE, and is a end-to-end
connection. The so-called virtual connection is that there is no circuit actually allocated
between two DTEs. With packet exchange technology and by means of dynamic
distribution and shared physical circuit, it is felt that a physical circuit exists between two
DTEs. Such connection is called VC. Sometimes, VC can be set up between one DTE
and multiple DTEs.
PVC refers to permanent virtual connection. The VC between two DTEs is occupied
permanently rather than the VC dynamically allocated and set up. So it is called PVC.
SVC refers to switch virtual circuit. VC is set up only when data communication is
195
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
required between two DTEs. When there is no communication, VC is disconnected to

release the communication mode of the resources. It is called SVC to be different from
VC. LC refers to the concept between DTE and DCE. A physical connection between
DTE and DCE can be divided into multiple logical connections, which is called LC.
9.21.4 VOD (Video on Demand)
For the broadcast television area, VOD (Video on Demand) is used to show the features
and service function of broadcast television better. For telecom and computer
communication area, VOD is used more frequently because video programs are much
more than TV, such as video games.
VOD started to develop in the 90'of the twentieth century. It is a video on demand
system based on the audience demand.
VOD has no strict definition. It refers, in general, to the service that provides interactive
video service when required by subscribers. In another word, "you can watch whatever
and whenever you want". It is a technology developed by integrating computer
technology, communication technology and television technology.
9.22 W
9.22.1 Wide Area Network
It is a computer communication network established in a wide range. The wide range
refers to the geographical area. It can cover a whole city, a country or even the whole
world. The requirement for communication is rigorous and it is more complex. The short
form of wide area network is WAN.
In actual application, WAL can be interconnected with LAN i. e. LAN is a terminal
system of WAN.
A WAN should be organized according to a certain network system structure and the
related protocols so as to implement the interconnection and co-operation of different
systems
9.23 X
9.23.1 X.25 Protocol
X.25 protocol is used mainly for packet networks. It has three layers which are called
physical layer, link layer and packet layer respectively. X.25 protocol should be used for
packet terminals to obtain access to a packet network. The physical channel of the packet
link can use the physical channel of dialing network, DDN or leased line. X.25 protocol
is mainly used for the inter-office connection between packet equipment.
9.23.2 X.50 Protocol
X.50 is a data channel multiplexing/demultiplexing protocol on the physical layer. Its
main function is to multiplex the sub-rate to 64K channels for transmission and
demultiplex them to the sub-rate at the destination. It has two versions as DIVISION3
196
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
and DIVISION2, corresponding to two types of envelope structure. One type consists of
20*8-bit envelopes and the other type consists of 80*8-bit envelopes. At present, the
envelope structure of 20*8-bit envelopes DIVISION3 is generally used, such as:
Phase 1
1
6
11
16
Phase 2
2
7
12
17
Phase 3
3
8
13
18
Phase 4
4
9
14
19
Phase 5
5
10
15
20
According to the transmitting sequence of the envelopes, they are numbered as 1~20.
Also according to their column positions, they can be divided into 5 phases. For sub-rate
interconnecting, the time slots, phases and envelopes should be correspondent to each
other completely so that the sub-rate channel can be free for transmission. In default, one
envelope corresponds to one 2.4K sub-rate channel. The combination of multiple
envelopes can form 4.8K/9.6K/19.2K/48k sub-rate channels.

197
Technical Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Appendix C HONET Pictures....................................................................................................... 199

198
Technical Manual
Chapter 10 HONET Pictures
1) OLT

199
Technical Manual
2) ONU-160B

200
Technical Manual
3) ONU-F01A
4) ONU-F02A
201
Technical Manual
5) RSP subscriber frame
6) GV5-III main control subrack (frame)
7) PON16-R

202

An Honet - Technical Manual (V7.11) PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

An Honet - Technical Manual (V7.11) PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Technical Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network

3.2.1 Physical Configuration of OLT................................................................................. 3-3

6.7.2 MML Interface ....................................................................................................... 6-46

B.5.3 DDN ........................................................................................................................B-6

B.18.7 Synchronization and Asynchronization...............................................................B-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figure 1-1 Position of AN in Telecom

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Figure 1-2 Schematic diagram of AN

Telecom Management Network (TMN)

Figure 1-3 Relationship between AN and NE

1.2 Functional Models of AN

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Bearing subscriber and subscriber signalings

Figure 1-4 Functional models of AN

1.2.1 User Port Function

To connect to terminals with UNI.

1.2.2 Service Port Function

To connect with the SNI terminal.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1.2.3 Core Function

Processing access services.

1.2.4 Transport Function

1.2.5 AN System Management Function

Configuration and control

1.3 AN Technologies and Developments

1.3.1 XDSL Access Technology

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

I. ISDN digital subscriber line (IDSL) technology

II. High-rate digital subscriber line (HDSL) technology

III. Symmetric digital subscriber line (SDSL) technology

IV. Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Technology

V. Very high-rate digital subscriber line (VDSL) technology

VI. Comparison of xDSL Access Technologies

Table 1-1 Comparison of xDSL Access Technologies

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Internet access, VOD, LAN

1.3.2 Optical Fiber AN Technology

II. PON technology

III. Hybrid optical/twisted pair copper cable network

1.3.3 Wireless AN Technology

I. Fixed wireless access

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

II. Mobile wireless access

1.3.4 IP Access Technology

Longer duration: Generally, the calling time of ordinary telephones is 3~5

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Chapter 2 System Description

Figure 2-1 HONET overall architecture

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Protocol processing module

Figure 2-2 OLT architecture

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

protocol processing module

Optical transmission module

Power and environment

Figure 2-3 ONU architecture

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2.1.3 Optical Transmission System

AN-NMS is based on TCP/IP protocol. It features client/server structure.